EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive

User Manual

Version V3.2
Revision date August 11, 2008
BOM 31011126

Emerson Network Power provides customers with technical support. Users may
contact the nearest Emerson local sales office or service center.

Copyright © 2005 by Emerson Network Power Co., Ltd.

All rights reserved. The contents in this document are subject to change without
notice.

Emerson Network Power Co., Ltd.

Address: No.1 Kefa Rd., Science & Industry Park, Nanshan District 518057,
Shenzhen China

Homepage: www.emersonnetworkpower.com.cn

Customer Service Hotline: +86 755 86010581

Complaint Hotline: +86 755 86010800

E-mail: [email protected]
 Contents
Preface ................................................................................................................................................................................ 1
Unpacking Inspection ................................................................................................................................................... 1
Model designation rules ............................................................................................................................................... 1
Chapter 1 Safety............................................................................................................................................................... 2
1.1 Safety .................................................................................................................................................................. 2
1.2 Notes for Installations .......................................................................................................................................... 2
1.3 Notes for Using EV2000 ...................................................................................................................................... 2
1.3.1 About Motor and Load .................................................................................................................................. 2
1.3.2 About Variable Speed Drive .......................................................................................................................... 3
1.4 Disposing Unwanted Drive .................................................................................................................................. 4
Chapter 2 Product Introduction ......................................................................................................................................... 5
2.1 Specifications ...................................................................................................................................................... 5
2.2 Product Series ..................................................................................................................................................... 7
2.2.1 Ratings .......................................................................................................................................................... 7
2.2.2 Parts of Variable Speed Drive ....................................................................................................................... 8
2.2.3 Outline and Gross Weight ............................................................................................................................. 8
2.3 Optional Parts .................................................................................................................................................... 12
2.3.1 LCD Operational Panel ............................................................................................................................... 12
2.3.2 Braking Kits ................................................................................................................................................. 12
2.3.3 Communication Parts .................................................................................................................................. 14
Chapter 3 Installation and Wiring .................................................................................................................................... 15
3.1 Installation Environment .................................................................................................................................... 15
3.2 Removing and Mounting of Parts ...................................................................................................................... 15
3.2.1 Removing and Installation of Operation Panel ............................................................................................ 15
3.2.2 Removing and Mounting of Cover ............................................................................................................... 16
3.3 Wire Connections of Drive ................................................................................................................................. 17
3.3.1 Wire Connections of Main Terminals .......................................................................................................... 17
3.3.2 Wiring of Control Circuit .............................................................................................................................. 22
3.4 Installation Methods Compliant With EMC Requirements ................................................................................. 31
3.4.1 Noise Suppressing ...................................................................................................................................... 31
3.4.2 Field Wire Connections ............................................................................................................................... 32
3.4.3 Earthing ...................................................................................................................................................... 33
3.4.4 Installation Requirements of Relay, Contactor and Electro-magnetic Braking Kit ....................................... 34
3.4.5 Leakage Current ......................................................................................................................................... 34
3.4.6 Correct EMC Installation ............................................................................................................................. 34
3.4.7 Application of Power Line Filter................................................................................................................... 35
3.4.8 EMI of The Drive ......................................................................................................................................... 36
Chapter 4 Operation Instructions .................................................................................................................................... 37
4.1 Notice ................................................................................................................................................................ 37
4.1.1 The Drive’s Control Modes.......................................................................................................................... 37
4.1.2 Reference Selector ..................................................................................................................................... 37
4.1.3 Operating Status ......................................................................................................................................... 37
4.1.4 Operating Modes ........................................................................................................................................ 37
4.2 Operating Instructions ....................................................................................................................................... 38
4.2.1 Using Operation Panel ................................................................................................................................ 38
4.2.2 Function of Keys ......................................................................................................................................... 39
4.2.3 Function Descriptions of LED and Indicators .............................................................................................. 39
 4.2.4 Display of the Drive ..................................................................................................................................... 40
4.2.5 Panel Operation .......................................................................................................................................... 40
4.3 Start-up .............................................................................................................................................................. 41
4.3.1 Checking before Start-up ............................................................................................................................ 41
4.3.2 Start up the Drive for the First Time ............................................................................................................ 42
Chapter 5 Parameter Introductions ................................................................................................................................. 43
5.1 Basic Operating Parameters(Group F0) ............................................................................................................... 43
5.2 Parameters of Reference Frequency (Group F1) .............................................................................................. 46
5.3 Starting and Braking Parameters (Group F2) .................................................................................................... 47
5.4 Auxiliary Operating Parameters (Group F3) ...................................................................................................... 49
5.5 PLC Operating Parameters(Group F4)................................................................................................................... 52
5.6 Close-loop Control Parameters(Group F5) ................................................................................................................. 55
5.7 Traverse Operating Parameters (Group F6) ...................................................................................................... 58
5.8 Function of Terminals(Group F7)....................................................................................................................... 60
5.9 Display (Group F8) ............................................................................................................................................ 69
5.10 Enhanced Functions(Group F9) ...................................................................................................................... 70
5.11 Reserved (Group FA) ...................................................................................................................................... 76
5.12 Communication Parameters (Group FF) ................................................................................................................ 76
5.13 Motor Parameters (Group FH) ......................................................................................................................... 77
5.14 Protective Function (Group FL) ....................................................................................................................... 78
5.15 Drive Parameters (Group Fn) .......................................................................................................................... 81
5.16 Protection of Parameters (FP) ......................................................................................................................... 81
Chapter 6 Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................................................. 83
Chapter 7 Maintenance .................................................................................................................................................. 88
7.1 Daily Maintenance ............................................................................................................................................. 88
7.2 Periodical Maintenance ..................................................................................................................................... 88
7.3 Replacing Wearing Parts ................................................................................................................................... 89
7.4 Storage .............................................................................................................................................................. 89
7.5 Warranty ............................................................................................................................................................ 89
Appendix 1 Parameters .................................................................................................................................................. 90
Appendix 2 Accessories ............................................................................................................................................... 108
AC/DC Reactor ........................................................................................................................................................ 108
380V Series EMI Filter ............................................................................................................................................. 111
Manufacturer Information ......................................................................................................................................... 112
Appendix 3 Communication Protocol ............................................................................................................................ 113
1 Networking Mode................................................................................................................................................ 113
2 Interfaces ............................................................................................................................................................ 113
3 Communication Modes ....................................................................................................................................... 113
4 Protocol Format .................................................................................................................................................. 114
5 Explanations of Format....................................................................................................................................... 114
5.1 Head of Frame................................................................................................................................................ 114
5.2 Address of Slave ............................................................................................................................................ 115
5.3 Response of Slave to Master’s Command ..................................................................................................... 115
5.4 Index Section .................................................................................................................................................. 116
5.5 Checksum ...................................................................................................................................................... 116
5.6 Frame Tail ...................................................................................................................................................... 116
 Preface 1

Preface
Thank you for using EV2000 series Variable Speed
Drive made by Emerson Network Power Co., Ltd.. Model designation rules
EV2000 satisfies the high performance requirements by EV2000 -4 T 0055 G / 0075 P
using a unique control method to achieve high torque, Drive series Code Drive type
high accuracy and wide speed-adjusting range. Its G Fixed torque
Volt Code P Fan & pump
anti-tripping function and capabilities of adapting to
220V 2
severe power network, temperature, humidity and dusty 380V 4 Code
Motor power
kW
environment exceed those of similar product made by
Input volt Code 0055 5.5
other companies, which improves the product’s reliability 3-phase T
0075 7.5
0110 11
noticeably; 0150 15
0185 18.5
EV2000 has integrated the general requirements, 0220 22
0300 30
customized requirements and industrial requirements 0370 37
0450 45
perfectly. It is a innovative product with practical PI, 0550 55
simple PLC, flexible input and output terminals, pulse 0750 75
0900 90
signal input, saving parameters at stop or power outage, 1100 110
1320 132
master/slave reference control, traverse operation, fixed 1600 160
2000 200
length control. It provides OEM customers with high 2200 220
integrated, reliable, cost-effective solution; 2800 280

EV2000 can satisfy the customers’ requirements on low

Fig. A-1 Explanations of Drive Models
noise and EMI by using optimized PWM technology and
EMC design. The nameplate is located on the right hand side of the
This manual provides information on installation, wiring, heatsink. The contents are shown in Fig.A-2. A barcode
parameter setting, trouble-shooting, and daily on the plastic cover also contains the information of the
maintenance. To ensure the correct installation and drive, as shown in Fig.A-3.
operation of the drive, please read this manual carefully
before starting the drive and keep it in a safe place.
MODEL： EV2000-4T0055G/0075P model
POWER： 5.5kW/7.5kW motor power
Unpacking Inspection INPUT： 3PH AC 380V-440V 15.5/20.5A 50Hz/60Hz
OUTPUT： 8.5/11KVA 13/17A 0-650Hz 0-440V
Upon unpacking, please check for:
S/N： barcode
Any damage occurred during transportation;
Check whether the rated values on the nameplate of the Emerson Network Power Co., Ltd.

drive are in accordance with your order. Fig. A-2 Nameplate Description
Our product is manufactured and packed at factory with
great care. If there is any error, please contact us or
distributors.
The user manual is subject to change without notifying Barcode

the customers due to the continuous process of product

improvements.

Nameplate

Fig. A-3 Locations of Nameplate and Barcode

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

2 Chapter 1 Safety

Chapter 1 Safety

1.1 Safety ! Attention

·Don’t carry the drive by its cover. The cover cannot
Operations without following
! Danger support the weight of the drive and may drop.
instructions can cause personal
·Please install the drive on a strong support, failing
injury or death.
Operations without following which the drive may fall off.
! Attention
instructions can cause personal ·Don’t install the drive in places where water pipes
injury or damage to product or other may leak onto it.
equipment. ·Don't allow screws, washers and other metal foreign
matters to fall inside the drive, otherwise there is a
1.2 Notes for Installations danger of fire or damage;
·Don't operate the drive if parts are not complete,
otherwise there is a danger of a fire or human injury;
! Danger
·Don't install the drive under direct sunshine,
·Please install the drive on fire-retardant material. otherwise it may be damaged;
·Keep the drive away from combustible materials ·Don’t short circuit P1/PB and terminal (-), otherwise
·Keep the drive away from explosive gas there is a danger of fire or the drive may be
·Only qualified personnel shall wire the drive damaged.
·Cable lugs must be connected to main terminals
·Never wire the drive unless the input AC supply is
firmly
totally disconnected
· Don’s apply supply voltage (AC 220V or higher) to
·The drive must be properly earthed to reduce
control terminals except terminals TA, TB and TC.
electrical accident
·Install the cover before switching on the drive, to
1.3 Notes for Using EV2000
reduce the danger of electric shock and explosion.
·For drives that have been stored for longer than 2 Pay attention to the following issues when using EV2000
years, increase its input voltage gradually before drive.
supplying full rated input voltage to it, in order to
avoid electric shock and explosion 1.3.1 About Motor and Load
·Don't touch the live control terminals with bare
hands Compared to the power frequency operation

·Don’t operate the drive with wet hands EV2000 series drives are voltage type variable speed
drive. The output voltage is in PWM wave with some
·Perform the maintenance job after confirming that
harmonics. Therefore, temperature rise, noise and
the charging LED is off or the DC Bus voltage is
vibration of motor are higher.
below 36V.
Low Speed Rotating with Constant Torque
·Only trained professionals can change the
components, it is prohibited to leave wires or metal Driving a common motor at low speed for a long time,
parts inside the drive so as to avoid the risk of fire. the drive’s life will be reduced due to the deteriorating
·Parameter settings of the control board that has heat dissipation effect, so a special variable frequency
motor is needed if long time operation with constant
been changed must be revised, otherwise accidents
torque is required.
may occur.
·The bare portions of the power cables must be bound Motor’s over-temperature protecting threshold
with insulation tapes. The drive can protect the motor from over-temperature.
If the ratings of the driven motor are not in compliance

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

 Chapter 1 Safety 3

with the drive, be sure to adjust the protective threshold 1.3.2 About Variable Speed Drive
to ensure the motor is properly protected.
Varistors or Capacitors Used to Improve the Power
Operate above 50Hz
Factor
When running the motor above 50Hz, there will be Don't connect any varistor or capacitor to the output
increase in vibration and noise. The rate at which the terminals of the drive, because the drive's output voltage
torque is available from the motor is inversely waveform is pulse wave, otherwise tripping or damaging
proportional to its increase in running speed. Ensure that of components may occur; in addition, don't install circuit
the motor can still provide sufficient torque to the load. breaker or contactor at the output side of the drive as
Lubrication of mechanical devices shown in Fig.1-2.
Over time, the lubricants in mechanical devices, such as
U
gear box, geared motor, etc. when running at low speed, EV2000
V M
will deteriorate. Frequent maintenance is recommended.
W
Braking Torque
Braking torque is developed in the machine when the
drive is hoisting a load down. The drive will trip when it
cannot cope with dissipating the regenerative energy of
the load. Therefore, a braking unit with proper
parameters setting in the drive is required.
Fig. 1-2 Capacitors are prohiBited to be used.
The mechanical resonance point of load
Circuit breakers connected to the output of the drive
The drive system may encounter mechanical resonance
with the load when operating within certain band of If circuit breaker or contactor needs to be connected
output frequency. Skip frequencies have been set to between the drive and the motor, be sure to operate
avoid it. these circuit breakers or contactor when the drive has
no output, to avoid damaging of the drive.
The drive should be started and stopped via its control
terminals. It is prohibited to start and stop the drive Using outside the range of rated voltage
directly through input line contactors, which may The drive is not suitable to be used out of the specified
damage the drive with frequent operations. range of operation voltage. If needed, please use
Insulation of Motors suitable voltage regulation device.
Before using the drive, the insulation of the motors must Change from 3-phase to 2-phase
be checked, especially, if it is used for the first time or if It is not recommended to change the drive from 3-phase
it has been stored for a long time. This is to reduce the input to 2-phase input. If it is necessary to use on two
risk of the Drive from being damaged by the poor phases, the phase-loss protection function of the drive
insulation of the motor. Wiring diagram is shown in Fig. should be disabled. The Drive must be derated for this
1-1. Please use 500V insulation tester to measure the operation. For motors at which power is above 30kW, if
insulating resistance. It should not be less than 5MΩ. it is changed into 2-phase input, then the input phases
must be at phase R and phase T, or else the drive will
not work.
After the 3-phase input is changed into 2-phase input,
Motor bus-voltage and current ripple may increase, which not
only influences the life of electrolytic capacitor but it also
deteriorates the performance of the drive. The drive’s
operating current should be derated and should not
Mega-Ohm-Meter exceed 67% of rated value.
Earthing
conductor Harmonic radiation
Fig. 1-1 Checking the insulation of motor The product is not intended to be connected to
low-voltage systems interfacing with the public supply at
the low-voltage level, but to be connected to low-voltage

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

4 Chapter 1 Safety

systems interfacing with the public supply only at the 1.4 Disposing Unwanted Drive
medium- or high-voltage level.
Protection against lightning strike When disposing the Drive, pay attention to the following
factors:
There are transient surge suppressors inside the Drive
which protects it against lighting strike. The capacitors may explode when they are burnt.
Poisonous gas may be generated when the plastic parts
Derating due to Altitude
like front covers are burnt.
Derating must be considered when the drive is installed
Disposing method: Please dispose the Drive as
at high altitude, greater than 1000m. This is because the
industrial waste.
cooling effect of Drive is deteriorated due to the thin air,
as shown in Fig.1-3 that indicates the relationship
between the elevation and rated current of the Drive.
Iout
100%

90%

80%
1000 2000 3000 4000 （m）

Fig. 1-3 Derating Drive's output current with altitude

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

 Chapter 2 Product Introduction 5

Chapter 2 Product Introduction

2.1 Specifications

Table 2-1 General specifications

Item Description

Rated voltage & frequency Three-phase,380V~440V; 50Hz/60Hz

Input
Permissible fluctuation range Voltage:320V~460V;Voltage unbalance rate:<3%; Frequency:±5%

Rated voltage 380V

Frequency 0Hz~650Hz

Output Type G: 150% rated current for 1 minute, 200% rated current for 0.5
second;
Over load ability Type P: 110% rated current for 1 minute, 150% rated current for 1
second

Modulation mode Flux vector PWM modulation

Speed range 1:100
Starting torque 180% rated torque at 0.50Hz
Steady accuracy of speed ≤±0.5% rated synchronous speed
Digital setting: highest frequency×±0.01%;analog setting: highest
Accuracy of frequency
frequency×±0.2%
Setting frequency resolution Digital setting:0.01Hz;analog setting: highest frequency×0.1%
Torque boost Auto torque boost, Manual torque boost0.1%~30.0%
4 modes: 1 V/F curve mode set by user and 3 kinds of torque-derating
V/F curve
modes (2.0 order, 1.7 order, and 1.2 order)
3 modes: linear Acc/Dec, S ramp Acc/Dec and auto Acc/Dec; Acc/Dec
Acc/Dec curve
time(maximum: 60 hours) and unit(second or minute) are settable.
Initial frequency of DC injection braking process: 0.20~60.00Hz,
Main control braking time: 0.0～30.0s
DC injection braking
functions braking current: Type G: 0.0～100.0％
Type P: 0.0～80.0％
Range of jog frequency:0.20Hz~50.00Hz; Acc/Dec time of Jog operation:
Jog
0.1~60.0s, Interval of Jog operation is also settable.
Multi-step speed running can be realized by internal PLC or control
Multi-step speed running
terminal
Internal PI Be able to form simple control system easily
V/F curve is optimized automatically according to the load condition to
Auto-energy saving operation
realize energy-saving operation.
When source voltage changes, the modulation rate can be adjusted
Auto voltage regulation(AVR)
automatically, so that the output voltage is unchanged.
Operating current is limited automatically to avoid frequent tripping of the
Auto current limiting
drive.
Auto adjusting of carrier Optional function. The carrier frequency can be adjusted automatically
frequency according to the load condition.

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

6 Chapter 2 Product Introduction

Item Description

Traverse operation Traverse operating function with adjustable central frequency

Fixed-length control The drive stops when preset fixed length is reached
Droop control Used in the application that several drives drive one motor.
Customized Tone adjusting Adjust the tone of the operating motor
function
Non-stop operation upon power Uninterrupted operation can be realized by controlling the bus voltage
failure when power failure occurs.
Control mode and reference selector (for example panel input or analog
Bundling function
VCI input) can be selected together at one time
Methods of inputting operating
Commands can be input by terminals and serial ports.
commands
Methods of setting up Digital setting; Analog voltage/current setup; pulse frequency setup; set
frequency via serial port and different setting modes are selectable
Operating
Auxiliary frequency reference Realize flexible fine tuning of auxiliary frequency.
function
0~50kHz pulse signal output. Signals like frequency setting and output
Pulse output terminal
frequency can be output.
2 analog outputs of 0/4~20mA and 0/2~10V(selectable). Be able to
Analog output terminals
output signals like reference frequency and output frequency.
Be able to display about 20 kinds of parameters such as frequency
LED display
setting, output frequency, output voltage and current, etc.
Operation LCD display Optional, Chinese/English display
panel Parameter copy Fast parameter copy can be realized by using LCD panel.
Keys locking up and function Be able to lock part or all the keys. Be able to define the functions of part
selection of the keys to avoid wrong operation.
Phase failure protection, Over current protection; Over voltage protection;
Protection function
Under voltage protection; Over heat protection; overload protection
LCD operation panel, braking kit, remote mounted keypad, remote control
Optional parts
cable and field bus adapter
In-door, free from direct sunlight, dust, corrosive gas, combustible gas, oil
Application environment
mist, steam, water drop or salt
Elevation Lower than 1000m
-10℃~+40℃(ambient temperature is within 40℃~50℃, deration is
Environment Ambient temperature
required)
Humidity Less than 95%RH, without condensation
2
Vibration Less than 5.9m/s (0.6g)
Storage temperature -40℃~+70℃
Protection level IP20
Structure
Cooling Fan cooling
Mount modes Mounted on the wall or inside cabinet
Efficiency For 45kW or below: ≥93%, 55kW or above: ≥95%

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

 Chapter 2 Product Introduction 7

2.2 Product Series

2.2.1 Ratings

Table 2-2 Variable Speed Drive series(55P or below)

Drive model (55P or below) Rated capacity Rated input current Rated output current Motor power
(G: constant torque, P: Fan & pump) (kVA) (A) (A) (kW)
EV2000-4T0055G/0075P 8.5/11 15.5/20.5 13/17 5.5/7.5
EV2000-4T0075G/0110P 11/17 20.5/26 17/25 7.5/11
EV2000-4T0110G/0150P 17/21 26/35 25/32 11/15
EV2000-4T0150G/0185P 21/24 35/38.5 32/37 15/18.5
EV2000-4T0185G1/0220P1 24/30 38.5/46.5 37/45 18.5/22
EV2000-4T0220G1/0300P1 30/40 46.5/62 45/60 22/30
EV2000-4T0300G1/0370P1 40/50 62/76 60/75 30/37
EV2000-4T0370G1/0450P1 50/60 76/92 75/90 37/45
EV2000-4T0450G1/0550P1 60/72 92/113 90/110 45/55
Table 2-3 Variable Speed Drive series(55G or above)
Drive model (55G or above) Rated Motor power
Rated input current Rated output current
capacity
Constant torque Fan & pump (A) (A) (kW)
(kVA)
EV2000-4T0550G － 72 113 110 55
EV2000-4T0750G EV2000-4T0750P 100 157 152 75
EV2000-4T0900G EV2000-4T0900P 116 180 176 90
EV2000-4T1100G EV2000-4T1100P 138 214 210 110
EV2000-4T1320G EV2000-4T1320P 167 256 253 132
EV2000-4T1600G EV2000-4T1600P 200 307 304 160
EV2000-4T2000G EV2000-4T2000P 250 385 380 200
EV2000-4T2200G EV2000-4T2200P 280 430 426 220
－ EV2000-4T2800P 342 525 520 280

Notes:
1. Models in shady area are under development.
2. Please contact the manufacturer for models of EV2000-4T2800G and EV2000-4T3150P.

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

8 Chapter 2 Product Introduction

2.2.2 Parts of Variable Speed Drive

Cover

Port for operation Control Cover's

panel board mounting hole Compartment for
Multi-function operation panel
terminal
Control terminal
Barcode
Charge
indicator

Power terminal Power

terminal
shielding
board Outlet holes for
Mounting AC output holes
hole Nameplate
Inlet holes for
signal cables Ventilation
holes

Fig. 2-1 Parts of drive

2.2.3 Outline and Gross Weight

1. Outline

Fig. a EV2000-4T0055G/0075P~ Fig. b EV2000-4T0185G1/0220P1～

EV2000-4T0150G/0185P EV2000-4T0220G1/0300P1

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

 Chapter 2 Product Introduction 9

Fig. c EV2000-4T0300G1/0370P1～ Fig. d EV2000-4T0550G~ Fig. e EV2000-4T01100G~

EV2000-4T0450G1/0550P1 EV2000-4T01100P EV2000-4T2800P

Fig. 2-2 Outline of EV2000

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

10 Chapter 2 Product Introduction

2. Mechanical parameters
Table 2-4 Mechanical parameters 1
EV2000-4T0055G/0075P～EV2000-4T0450G1/0550P1、EV2000-4T0550G、EV2000-4T0750G、EV2000-4T0750P、
EV2000-4T0900P、EV2000-4T0900G、EV2000-4T1100P
Diameter of
Drive model (55P or below) Motor A B H W D Fig. Gross
mounting
(G: constant torque, P: Fan & pump) (kW) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) Number weight(kg)
hole(mm)
EV2000-4T0055G/0075P 5.5/7.5
186 285 300 200 202 6.8 Fig. a 7.5
EV2000-4T0075G/0110P 7.5/11
EV2000-4T0110G/0150P 11/15
236 365 380 250 209 6.8 Fig. a 12
EV2000-4T0150G/0185P 15/18.5
EV2000-4T0185G1/0220P1 18.5/22 13
180 421 435 275 209 7 Fig. b
EV2000-4T0220G1/0300P1 22/30 15
EV2000-4T0300G1/0370P1 30/37
250 600 624 375 262 9 Fig. b 35
EV2000-4T0370G1/0450P1 37/45
EV2000-4T0450G1/0550P1 45/55 38
EV2000-4T0550G _ 55 300 747 770 468 301 10 Fig. d 50
EV2000-4T0750G EV2000-4T0750P 75 300 747 770 468 301 10 Fig. d 50
EV2000-4T0900G EV2000-4T0900P 90 300 747 770 468 301 10 Fig. d 90
EV2000-4T1100P 110 300 747 770 468 301 10 Fig. d 90

Table 2-5 Mechanical parameters 1

EV2000-4T1100G~EV2000-4T2200G. EV2000-4T2200P. EV2000-4T2800P
Drive model Diameter of
Motor A B H W D Fig. Gross
mounting holes
Constant torque Fan & pump (kW) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) Number weight (kg)
(mm)
EV2000-4T1100G - 110 370 855 880 530 370 14 100
EV2000-4T1320G EV2000-4T1320P 132 370 855 880 530 370 14 100
EV2000-4T1600G EV2000-4T1600P 160 370 855 880 530 370 14 100
- EV2000-4T2000P 200 370 855 880 530 370 14 Fig. e 100
EV2000-4T2000G - 200 520 975 1000 680 370 14 140
EV2000-4T2200G EV2000-4T2200P 220 520 975 1000 680 370 14 140
- EV2000-4T2800P 280 520 975 1000 680 370 14 140

Notes:
1. Models in Table 2-5 are under developing.
2. For 75kWG drive or above, DC reactor is included in its standard configuration. The weight of DC reactor in the above table is
not included in the gross weight. Outline and dimensions of DC reactor are shown below.

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

 Chapter 2 Product Introduction 11

Diameter of terminal

Enlarged view of terminal

Mounting hole Mounting hole

Fig. 2-3 Dimensions of DC reactor

Table 2-6 Mechanical Parameters of DC Reactor

Applicable Recommended Size(mm) Gross
Model of DC
drive size of copper Diameter weight
reactor A B C D E F G H I J
(kW) （mm2） of terminal (kg)
75G
TDL-4DI01-0900 60 190 160 125 161 120 80 10 250 280 25 φ12 23
90G/90P
110G/110P TDL-4DI01-1100 100 190 160 125 161 120 80 10 250 280 25 φ12 25
132G/132P TDL-4DI01-1320 150 200 170 135 171 120 85 10 260 280 30 φ12 28
160G/160P TDL-4DI01-1600 150 210 180 135 171 130 85 12 280 320 30 φ12 32
200G/200P 200
TDL-4DI01-2200 220 190 135 171 150 90 12 315 340 40 φ15 40
220G/220P 250
280P TDL-4DI01-2800 325 220 190 145 181 160 95 12 315 340 40 φ15 45

Notes:
1. Columns B and C in Table 2-6 are the sizes of mounting holes of DC reactor.
2. DC reactor should be installed at the bottom of the cabinet if it is to be installed inside a cabinet. The clearance between reactor
and the drive should be at least 35cm, and the reactor should be as far away from the air inlet port of the drive as possible.

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

12 Chapter 2 Product Introduction

3. Optional panel and mounting box

a) Operation panel b) Mounting box (Model: EVF-KB02)

Fig. 2-4 Operation panel and mounting box

2.3 Optional Parts 2.3.2 Braking Kits

All the optional parts are given below, make additional 1. Braking kit
orders if needed. TDB 4C01 0150
Braking Motor
2.3.1 LCD Operational Panel kit
Code power
220V 2
Model:TDP-LCD03 Volt Code 380V 4
220V 2 660V 6
Language: Chinese/English optional 380V 4
660V 6 Braking unit
LCD operation panel can perform fast parameter copy.
Interface: As shown in Fig. 2-5, the interface is divided
Fig. 2-6 Model of braking kit
into main display area, operation instruction area and
explanations for operation instructions. 2. Braking resistor
Main display area: Display the status, parameters. TDB R01 0015 0400
Operation display area: Display the next operation, if Braking
Code Resistor
there are several operations for selection, the operation Kit
0400 2
contents will be displayed in this area one by one. Braking 0200 4
resistor 0100 6
Explanations for operations: Display the explanations for
the “operation display area” Power Code
1.5kW 0015
3.0kW 0030
Freq. Set Mode Main display area 5.0kW 0050

E/D Parameter Operation display area Fig. 2-7 Explanations of Model of braking resistor

FREQ SET Main display area

E/D DATA SET Operation display area

Fig. 2-5 LCD display interface

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

 Chapter 2 Product Introduction 13

3. Configurations
Table 2-7 Specifications of braking kit and resistor
Ratio of working time of Maximum
Rated motor Model of braking Braking Model of braking
braking kit to drive’s total continuous
power(kW) resistor torque (%) kit
working time (%) operating time(s)
5.5 - 10 100 10 Built-in
7.5 - 10 100 10 Built-in
11 TDB-R01-0015-0400 10 100 10 TDB-4C01-0150
15 TDB-R01-0015-0400 10 100 10 TDB-4C01-0150
18.5 TDB-R01-0015-0400 10 100 10 TDB-4C01-0150
22 TDB-R01-0030-0200 10 100 10 TDB-4C01-0300
30 TDB-R01-0030-0200 10 100 10 TDB-4C01-0300
37 TDB-R01-0030-0200 10 100 10 TDB-4C01-0300
45 TDB-R01-0050-0100 10 100 10 TDB-4C01-0550
55 TDB-R01-0050-0100 10 100 10 TDB-4C01-0550
75 TDB-R01-0050-0100 10 100 10 TDB-4C01-0550

Notes
1. There is a braking kit inside the 7.5kW drive or below. An external braking resistor is needed to be connected if dynamic
braking is required and the recommended resistor is 1000W/100Ω.
2. The 90kW drive or above should use several braking kits connected in parallel (TDB-4C01-0550).

4. Outline and installation sizes

Fig. 2-9 Installation dimensions of braking resistor

Fig. 2-8 Installation dimensions of braking kit
Table 2-9 Installation dimensions of braking resistor
Table 2-8 Installation dimensions of braking kit(unit: mm)
Model of braking Gross (unit: mm)
A B C D E Model of braking Gross
kit weight A B C D E F
resistor weight
TDB-4C01-0150 254 143 144 240 100 3 kg
TDB-4R01-0015-0400 475 228 127 447 177 460 3 kg
TDB-4C01-0300 254 143 144 240 100 3 kg
TDB-4R01-0030-0200 500 350 128 480 298 490 6 kg
TDB-4C01-0550 254 130 170 240 126 4 kg TDB-4R01-0050-0100 540 520 170 520 470 530 8 kg
5. Functions and wiring
A. Wire connections braking resistor and braking kit

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

14 Chapter 2 Product Introduction

EV2000 RS485 communication mode is used between the drive

U and the remote mounted keypad. A 4-core cable is used
R M
V
W to connect the drive and the keypad, and the maximum
S
PE distance can be 1000m. Master/slave communication
T
(-) (+) mode is used. The keypad is the master and the drive is
the slave. Cable terminals can be secured by common
PR
P TA P TH1 screws, which makes it convenient for maintenance.
TB TH2
N TC PR
One remote mounted keypad can control several drives
by connecting the communication cables of 485+ and
braking unit braking resistor 485- of each drive to form a RS485 network.
Fig. 2-10 Connecting the braking kit to the Drive Functions:
1) Be able to control the start, stop, jog operation, fault
TA-TB and TA-TC are contacts of relay used for
reset of slave drives and change the frequency settings
outputting fault indicating signal, and TH1 and TH2 are
and operation direction.
contacts of temperature relay (relay used for outputting
2) Identify the type of slave machine automatically. Be
over-heat indicating signal).
able to monitor the operating frequency, frequency
B. Main functions of braking kit
setting, output voltage and current, analog close-loop
Activation voltage for braking is adjustable; feedback, analog close-loop setting and external
Protection against excessive duty-cycle of braking counting value automatically.
resistor;
3. Fieldbus adapter
Overheat protection of heatsink;
Model: TDS-PA01
Alarm indication for power module’s fault;
Be able to connect ENYDRIVE drive to PROFIBUS
Fault indication and indication for fault relay output;
network via the TDS-PA01 fieldbus adapter. In the
The braking resistor will be disconnected automatically if PROFIBUS network system, the drive operates as a
it is over-heated and the relay will output alarming slave.
signal.
Functions:
The cables connected between the braking kit and the
1) To send control commands to drive (such as: start,
drive, and those between the braking kit and braking
stop and jog);
resistor should be less than 5m. If longer than 5m,
2) To send speed or frequency reference signal to the
twisted-pair cable should be used and the maximum
drive;
length is 10m.
3) To read operating status information and actual
2.3.3 Communication Parts values from the drive;
4) To reset the drive when fault occurs in it.
1. Communication cables
4. DrvWindows host monitoring software
A. Cables of operation panel
Version: DrvWindows V1.2
Model: TDC-CB0015(1.5m)
Used in the control network formed by TD1000, TD2000
TDC-CB0030(3.0m) and TD2100 series drive via RS485 bus. It can monitor
The cables are used to connect the panel to the drive. the operating status of the drive connected to the bus
B. Communication cables of remote mounted keypad and realize the central management of the drive. The
Two models: FRC21W1(3.0m) FRC21W2(30m) software’s friendly interfaces make the operation
convenient. This software now support EV2000 drive.
The cables are used to connect the remote mounted
keypad to the drive. Functions:
Polling of slave drives, frequency setting, operating and
2. Remote mounted keypad
stopping, changing and querying the settings of
Model: TDO-RC02
parameter.
It uses the same structure with operation panel of the
5. Keypad Holder
drive. It is easily to be installed and secured and
Model: EVF-KB02
convenient for hand-held operation. Its display is similar
to the operation panel.

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

 Chapter 3 Installation and Wiring 15

Chapter 3 Installation and Wiring

3.1 Installation Environment air expulsion by 35cm

fan or above
Please mount the drive vertically inside a well-ventilated
location.
When selecting mounting environment, the following
issues should be taken into account: 15cm 15cm
or or
Ambient temperature should be within the range of
above above
-10℃~40℃. If the temperature is higher than 40 ℃, the
drive should be derated and forced ventilation is
required; 35cm
Humidity should be lower than 95% non-condensing or above
Mount in the location where vibration is less than
5.9m/s2 (0.6G);
Fig. 3-2 Installation clearance(55kW or above)
Mount in the location free of direct sunlight, dust, metal
powder, corrosive gas or combustible gas.
If there are any special requirements for installation,
please contact us for clarifications.
The requirements on mounting space and clearance are
shown in Fig. 3-1 and Fig. 3-2.
Drive
When two Variable Speed Drives are mounted one on
top the other, an air flow diverting plate should be fixed
in between as shown in Fig. 3-3.

air expulsion by fan 10cm Drive

or above

5cm 5cm
or or Fig. 3-3 Installation of several drives
above above

3.2 Removing and Mounting of Parts

10cm
or above
3.2.1 Removing and Installation of Operation Panel
Fig. 3-1 Installation clearance (45kW or below)
1. Disassembly
Put your middle finger into the hole on the top of
operation panel, press down the snapper and pull the
panel outward as shown in. Figure 3-4.
2. Installation
Place the bottom edge of the operation panel at the
hooks of the mounting groove and press down the

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

16 Chapter 3 Installation and Wiring

snapper with your middle finger. Then press the panel ②Insert the top clamp into the slot at the top of the
inward to snap it in position as shown in Figure 3-4. drive;
③Mount the screws at the bottom part of the cover;
④Install the operation panel

1 Fig. 3-5 Removing and installation of plastic cover

Note:
Pull out or insert the plastic cover gently, otherwise the
mounting clamp may be damaged.
2. Procedures of removing and mounting the metal
cover
3
1) Procedures of removing the metal cover:
2 ①Remove the operational panel;
②Remove all the screws on the cover;
Fig. 3-4 Removing and Mounting of Operation Panel ③Take out the cover horizontally.
Where: 1&2: holding clamp 3:panel 2) Procedures of installing the metal cover:

①Mount the cover on the frame by screws;

3.2.2 Removing and Mounting of Cover
②Install the operation panel.
EV2000 series have two kinds of cover, plastic or
metallic one. Follow the steps below to remove and
mount the cover.
1. Removing and mounting of plastic covers

1) Removing:

① Remove the operation panel

② Remove two screws at bottom
③ Lift the bottom of cover up to 5~10 degrees, move it
upward at least 10mm until the clamp are out of the slot
on the cabinet, then remove the front panel.
2) Mounting of plastic cover:

①Tilt the cover 5~10 degree; Fig. 3-6 Removing and mounting metal cover

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

 Chapter 3 Installation and Wiring 17

3.3 Wire Connections of Drive QF

R
U
3-phase
S V
AC EV2000 M
supply W
T PE
! Danger . VRF
. VCI FWD .
·Wiring can only be done after the drive’s AC power is cut
. CCI REV .
off and all the LEDs on the operation panel are off. Wait for . GND COM .
at least 5mins before removing the panel.
·Wiring can only be done after confirming the charge
Fig. 3-7 Wiring
indicator on the right bottom is off and the voltage between
main circuit power terminals + and - is below DC36V.
·Wire connections can only be done by trained and 3.3.1 Wire Connections of Main Terminals
authorized personnel.
·Check the wiring carefully before connecting emergency 1. Connection between drive and optional parts
stopping or safety circuits. R
S
T
·Check the drive’s voltage level before supplying power to N
it, or human injuries and equipment damage may happen. Isolator switch

Circuit breaker or
fuse
! Attention AC input reactor

·Ensure that the drive’s rated input voltage is in compliant Contactor

with the AC supply voltage before using it.
Input EMI filter
·Dielectric strength test of the drive has been done in
factory, so you need not do it again. R S T P1
DC reactor
+
·See chapter 2 on connected braking resistor or braking kit. EV2000
Braking unit
·It is prohibited to connect the AC supply cables to the -
PE U V W Braking resistor
drive’s terminals U, V and W.
·Grounding cables should be copper cables with section Output EMI filter
area bigger than 3.5mm2, and the grounding resistance
should be less than 10Ω. AC output reactor

·Leakage current exists in the drive. The total leakage

M
IM
current is bigger than 3.5mA, depending on the usage
conditions. To ensure safety, the drive and the motor should
Fig. 3-8 Wire connection between the drive and optional parts
be grounded, and a leakage current protector (RCD) should
be used. It is recommended to choose B type RCD and set 1). Isolation switch should be connected between the AC
the leakage current at 300mA. supply and the drive to ensure the safety of the
·The drive should be connected to the AC supply via a maintenance engineer.
circuit breaker or fuse to provide input over-current 2). Circuit breaker (QF) or fuse should be connected
protection or convenience for disconnecting the AC supply between the AC supply and the drive to isolate the fault of
to maintain the drive. other equipment. Refer to Table 3-1 for the selection of
circuit breaker.
Wire the drive according to Fig. 3-7 during 3) When a contactor is used for controlling the AC supply,
commissioning: don’t use it to switch on or off the Variable Speed Drive.
Table 3-1 Recommended capacity of circuit breaker and
the cross sectional area of copper cable
Input Main circuit Control circuit
switch (mm2) (mm2)
Model
Circuit
EV2000-4T Input Output Control
breaker
cable cable terminal
QF(A)
0055G/0075P 32 4 4 1

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

18 Chapter 3 Installation and Wiring

Input Main circuit Control circuit capacity of the drive is above 550KVA, or if the input AC
switch (mm2) (mm2) supply capacity is 10 times that of the drive, a DC reactor
Model
Circuit is required to connect to the drive.
EV2000-4T Input Output Control
breaker
cable cable terminal (5) Input AC Line Reactor
QF(A)
0075G/0110P 40 6 6 1 A line reactor should be used if the distortion of power
0110G/0150P 63 6 6 1 network is severe or the input current harmonic level is
0150G/0185P 63 6 6 1 high even after a DC reactor has been connected to the
drive. It can also be used to improve the AC input power
0185G/0220P 100 10 10 1
factor of the drive.
0220G/0300P 100 16 16 1
6) Output AC Line Reactor
0300G/0370P 125 25 25 1
When the cables from the drive to motor are longer than
0370G/0450P 160 25 25 1
80m, multi-stranded cables and an AC line reactor should
0450G/0550P 200 35 35 1 be used to suppress the high frequency harmonics. Thus,
0550G 200 35 35 1 the motor insulation is protected against heat due to
0750G 0750P 250 70 70 1 harmonics, leakage current is reduced and the drive will
0900G 0900P 315 70 70 1 not trip frequently.
1100G 1100P 400 95 95 1 (7) Input EMI filter
1320G 1320P 400 150 150 1 An EMI filter can be used to suppress the high frequency
1600G 1600P 630 185 185 1 noise generated by the drive’s power cables.

2000G 2000P 630 240 240 1 (8) Output EMI filter

2200G 2200P 800 150×2 150×2 1 An EMI filter can be used to suppress the drive’s output
noise and leakage current of cables.
2800P 1000 185×2 185×2 1
(9) Safety ground
Note: Since there is leakage current inside the drive, to ensue
1, Parameters in the table are recommended values. safety, both the drive and the motor should be grounded,
2, The input protection fuses of inverters EV2000-4T0185G1/ the grounding resistance should be less than 10Ω. The
0220P1 and EV2000-4T0220G1/ 0300P1 are respectively the ground wire should be as short as possible. Please refer
RT16 Series 63A and 80A products of Xi'an Fusegear to the section of the earth wire in Table 3-2.
Manufacture Company. Table 3-2 Section of Ground Wire
4). DC reactor Min. section of ground
Cable Section (mm2)
DC reactor is required for the drive whose power is wire Sp（mm2）
greater than EV2000-4T0750G, for the drive whose S≤16 S
power is lower than EV2000-4T0750P, it is optional. 16＜S≤35 16
35＜S S/2
Under following conditions, a DC reactor should be used
Note that the data in the above table apply when the
to reduce the impact of AC supply to the drive and to
conductor connected with the ground wire are made of
protect the drive and suppress the high-order harmonics.
the same metal, otherwise, please calculate the
(1) If a capacitor tank used for reactive power
equivalent section based on the conductivity.
compensation or a SCR load shares the same AC supply
with the drive, the harmonics caused by the SCR load or Notes:
the capacitor tank when it is switched on or off may 1. EV2000 drive can meet the requirements of IEC 61800-3
damage the drive’s input rectifying circuit; after EMI filter is installed.
(2) When the unbalance rate of 3-phase AC supply of the 2. Installation of input and output EMI filters must be as close
drive is greater than 3%; to the drive as possible. Refer to Section 3.4 of Chapter 3 for
(3) If the input power factor of the drive is required to be EMC installation instructions.
greater than 0.93; 3. Refer to Section 2.3 of Chapter 2 and Appendix 2 for the
(4) When a large capacity transformer is connected to the technical parameters of optional parts.
drive, the input current of the drive may damage the
rectifying circuit. Generally, if the input AC supply

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

 Chapter 3 Installation and Wiring 19

2. Wire Connections of Drive for Basic Operation

Models: EV2000-4T0055G/0075P. EV2000-4T0075G/0110P
DCL DC reactor
Braking resistor
(connect optional parts
(connect optional parts
externally)
P1 (+) PB (-) externally)
Breaker
R U
3-phase R S V
380V S T W
M
50/60Hz T PE

P24 Aux. P24

Power COM PG
PLC supply X7
Forward/stop X8
FWD PE
Reverse/stop
REV
0/4～20mA . GND DC current
Multi-function input 1 . meter
X1 0～10V . AO1
Multi-function input 2
X2 CN16 0/4-20mA current
Multi-function input 3
X3 0/4～20mA . AO2 signal
Multi-function input 4 .
X4 0～10V . P24
Multi-function input 5 Output 0-24V pulse
X5 CN17 DO signal
Multi-function input 6
X6 COM Frequency meter
Multi-function input 7
Multi-function input 8 X7 Y1 Output 1 Bi-direction open
X8 EV2000
Y2 Output 2 collector output
COM
Speed command CME
0~10V Common terminal
VRF COM

VCI TA
0～10V/0～20mA . TB Programmable
CCI . I
. TC relay output
GND V
CN10 485+ RS485
PE communication port
485-
RS232 .
. TXD
RS485 . RS232
RXD
CN14 GND communication
port

Fig. 3-9 Basic wiring 1

Notes:
1. Terminal CCI can be input voltage or current signal by switching the jumper CN10 on control board;
2. The auxiliary power supply comes from the bus (+) and bus (-);
3. Built-in braking kit is installed and a braking resistor is required to be connected between (+) and PB;
4. In the above figure, “O” is the terminal in main circuit, and “⊙” is the control terminal;
5. Refer to section 3.3.2 for the using of control terminals.

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

20 Chapter 3 Installation and Wiring

Applicable models: EV2000-4T0110G/0150P~EV2000-4T2800P

Braking resistor
DCL DC reactor or braking unit
(connect externally,optional
parts for 75kW or below) P P (Connect optional parts
N PB externally)
P1 (+) (-)
Breaker
R U
3-phase R
S V
380V S W
M
T
50/60Hz T PE

R0
Aux.
Power P24
P24
supply COM
PG
PLC T0 X7
X8
Forward/stop
FWD PE
Reverse/stop
REV 0/4～20mA GND
. DC current
Multi-function input1 0～10V .
X1 . AO1 meter
Multi-function input2
X2 CN16 0/4-20mA current
Multi-function input3 . AO2
X3 0/4～20mA . signal
Multi-function input4 . P24
X4 0～10V Output 0-24V pulse
Multi-function input5
X5 CN17 DO signal
Multi-function input6 COM Frequency meter
X6
Multi-function input7
X7 Y1 Output 1 Bi-direction open
Multi-function input8
X8 collector output
COM EV2000 Y2 Output 2
Speed command CME
0～10V Common terminal
VRF COM
VCI TA
0～10V/0～20mA . Programmable
CCI .. I TB
relay output
GND V TC
CN10 485+
RS485
PE 485- communication port
.
RS232 .
TXD
RS485 . RS232
RXD communication
CN14 GND port

Fig. 3-10 Basic wiring 2

Notes:
1. Terminal CCI can be input voltage or current signal by switching the jumper CN10 on control board;
2. The auxiliary power supply’s AC supply comes from R0 and T0 which are shorted with R and T of 3-phase input. If you want
to use an external AC supply, the shorting bars between R and R0, T and T0 have to be removed before connecting the external
AC supply via R0 and T0. Otherwise, short-circuit will occur.
3. It is prohibited to connect to the control power supply without disconnecting the short-circuit bar, so as to avoid short-circuit
accident;
4. If external braking parts are needed, then braking kit and braking resistors should be included; Pay attention to the polarity of
the braking kit when wiring;
5. In the above figure, “O” is the terminal in main circuit, and “⊙” is the control terminal;
6. Refer to section 3.3.2 for the using of control terminals.

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

 Chapter 3 Installation and Wiring 21

Applicable models: EV2000-4T0185G1/0220P1～EV2000-4T0450G1/0550P1

DCL DC reactor braking unit and braking
resistor (external, optional)
(external, optional)
buffer resistor P P
(built-in) N PB
P P1 (+) (-)
breaker
R U
3-phase R
V
380V S S M
Transistor W
50/60Hz T PE
T

Auxiliary
R0 power
P24 P24
T0 supply COM
PG
PLC X7
X8
Foward/Stop
FWD PE
Reverse/Stop
REV GND
0/4-20mA .
MS input 1 .
AO1
X1 0-10V . DC current meter
MS input 2
X2 CN16
MS input 3 AO2 0/4-20mA current signal
MS input 4 X3 0/4-20mA ..
X4 0-10V . P24 frequency meter (open collector output)
MS input 5
X5 CN17
MS input 6 DO
X6 0-24V pulse output signal
MS input 7 COM
X7
MS input 8 EV2000
X8 Y1 output 1
2-way open collector output
COM Y2 output 2
Speed instruction CME
VRF COM common terminal
0～10V
VCI TA
0～10V/0～20mA .
CCI . I TB Programmable relay output
. V
GND TC
CN10 485+
PE 485- Standard RS485 port
RS232 .
. TXD
RS485 . RXD
Standard RS232 port
CN14 GND

Fig. 3-11 Basic Wiring 3

Notes:
1. Terminal CCI can be input voltage or current signal by switching the jumper CN10 on control board;
2. The auxiliary power supply of EV2000-4T0185G1/0220P1～EV2000-4T0220G1/0300P1 is from bus (＋) and (－)。
3. The auxiliary power supply of EV2000-4T0300G1/0370P1～EV2000-4T0450G1/0550P1 is from R and T. If you want to use
an external AC supply, the jumper on CN4 should be connected to CN3 first, and then connect it to R0 and T0.
4. If external braking kit, the braking unit and braking resistors should be included; Pay attention to the polarity of the braking kit
when wiring;
5. In the above figure, “O” is the terminal in main circuit, and “⊙” is the control terminal;
6. Refer to section 3.3.2 for the usage of control terminals.

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

22 Chapter 3 Installation and Wiring

3. Input/Output Terminals in Main Circuit Table 3-5 Terminals of main circuit

Terminal Function
1) Applicable models:
R, S, T 3-phase 380V AC supply input terminals
EV2000-4T0055G/0075P~EV2000-4T0150G/0185P
P1, (+) Reserved terminals for DC reactor
R S T P1 (+) PB (-) U V W PE (-) Output terminal for DC Minus Bus
POWER SUPPLY MOTOR U, V, W 3-phase AC output terminals
PE Earth terminal
Table 3-3 Terminals of main circuit
4) Applicable models:
Terminals Function
EV2000-4T0750G~EV2000-4T2200G
R, S, T 3-phase 380V AC supply input terminals
Reserved terminals for DC reactor, EV2000-4T0900P~EV2000-4T2800P
P1, (+) connected with copper bar before Top：
delivery. R S T
POWER SUPPLY
(+), PB Reserved terminals for braking resistor
(-) Output terminal for DC Minus Bus
U, V, W 3-phase AC output terminals Bottom： U V W P1 (+) (-) PE
PE Earth terminal MOTOR

Notes:
Table 3-6 Terminals of main circuit
Terminals PB of EV2000-4T0110G/0150P and
EV2000-4T0150G/0185P are suspended. Terminals Function
3-phase 380V AC supply input
2) Applicable models: R. S. T
terminals
EV2000-4T0185G/0220P~EV2000-4T0450G/0550P
P1. (+) Reserved terminals for DC reactor
R S T P P1 (+) (-) U V W PE (-) Output terminal for DC Minus Bus
POWER SUPPLY MOTOR U. V. W 3-phase AC output terminals
Table 3-4 Terminals of main circuit PE Earth terminal
Terminals Function
3-phase 380V AC supply input 3.3.2 Wiring of Control Circuit
R. S. T
terminals
P Positive pole of the rectifying bridge 1. Terminals and jumpers of control board
Reserved terminals for DC reactor, Locations of terminals CN5, CN6 and CN7 and jumpers
P1, (+) connected by copper bar before CN10, CN14, CN16 and CN17 are shown in Fig. 3-.
delivery
Terminal functions are given in Table 3-6. Refer to table
(-) Output terminal for DC Minus Bus
3-7 for the functions and settings of jumpers. Wire the
U. V. W 3-phase AC output terminals terminals and set the jumpers correctly before using the
PE Earth terminal Drive. It is recommended to use cables bigger than
3) Applicable models: 1mm2 to connect to the terminals.
EV2000-4T0550G. EV2000-4T0750P
Top：
(-) (+) P1 R S T
POWER SUPPLY

Bottom： U V W PE
MOTOR

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

 Chapter 3 Installation and Wiring 23

CN1 CN2
CN7
Table 3-7 Functions of terminals provided to users
SN Function
CN3 Analog input and output terminal, RS232 and
CN5
RSRS485 communication port
CN6 Digital input/output terminal
CN7 Relay output terminal
CN4
Table 3-8 Functions of jumpers provided to users
CN6 DSP
Factory
SN Function and settings
CN9 settings
mA
CN16 Used for selecting CCI current/voltage
V
mA input
CN17 CN10 0~10V
V I: 0/4~20mA current signal,
232
CN14
485 V: 0~10V voltage signal
I
CN10 Used for selecting communication
CN5 V
ports (RS232 or RS485)
CN14 RS485
RS232: Select RS232 port,
Fig. 3-12 Locations of jumpers on the control board RS485: Select RSRS485 port
Used for selecting the output signal
(current or voltage) of analog output
CN16 terminal AO1; 0~10V
0/4~20mA: AO1 output current signal;
0~10V: A01 output voltage signal
Used for selecting the output signal
(current or voltage) of analog output
CN17 terminal AO2; 0~10V
0/4~20mA: AO2 output current signal;
0~10V: AO2 output voltage signal

Fig. 3-13 Control board

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

24 Chapter 3 Installation and Wiring

2. Wire connections of terminals on control board

1) Terminal CN5 on control board
Arrangements of terminals of CN5:
VRF VCI CCI GND AO1 AO2 GND TXD RXD 485+ 485- PE
Functions of terminals of CN5 are given in Table 3-.
Table 3-9 Functions of the terminals
Category Terminals Name Function Specification
RS485+ RS485 RS485 + Standard RS-485 communication
RS232/RS485
communication port, please use twisted-pair cable
RS485- RS485 - can be selected
Communication

port or shielded cable.

by jumper CN14,
Transmitting pin Standard RS232 communication
TXD RS232 RS485 mode is
(Reference ground: GND) port, 3-wire connection (only use
communication the default
Receiving pin (reference TXD, RXD and GND).
RXD port mode.
ground: GND) Maximum distance: 15m
Input voltage range:0~10V
Analog Analog input Be able to accept analog voltage input
VCI (input resistance:100kΩ)
input VCI (Reference ground: GND)
Resolution: 1/2000
Input voltage range:0~10V(input
Be able to accept analog voltage/current
resistance:100kΩ)
Analog Analog input input. Jumper CN10 can select voltage or
CCI Input current range:0~20mA
input CCI current input mode, Voltage input mode is
(input resistance:500Ω)
the default mode.(reference ground: GND)
Resolution: 1/2000
Be able to output analog voltage/current
(total 12 kinds of signals). Jumper CN16 can
AO1 Analog output 1 select voltage or current input mode, Voltage
input mode is the default mode. Refer to
Analog F7.26 for details. (reference ground: GND) Output current range: 0/4~20mA
output Be able to output analog voltage/current Output voltage range:0/2~10V
(total 12 kinds of signals). Jumper CN17 can
AO2 Analog output 2 select voltage or current input mode, Voltage
input mode is the default mode. Refer to
F7.27 for details.(reference ground: GND)
+10V power
VRF Provide +10V power supply Maximum output current is 50mA
Power supply
supply GND of +10V Reference ground of analog signal and 10V
GND Isolated with COM and CME
power supply power supply
Terminal used for the earthing the shielding
layer. The shielding layers of analog signal
Shielding GND of
PE cable, RS485 communication cable and Connected to PE inside the drive.
layer shielding layer
motor cable can be connected to the
terminal.

1. Wiring analog input terminal

①VCI can accept analog voltage signal input and wiring is shown below:

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

 Chapter 3 Installation and Wiring 25

●
VRF(+10V)

●
VCI EV2000
0～+10V
●
GND
PE
Nearer shielding wire's end is ●

connected to PE

Fig. 3-14 Wiring terminal VCI

②CCI can accept analog signal input and the jumper can be used to select voltage input (0~10V) and current input
(0/4~20mA). The wiring is shown below:
CCI current
● VRF(+10V) I

· · ·
V
●
CCI CCI voltage
0～+10V
or 0/4～20mA
EV2000
●
GND PE I

· · ·
Nearer shielding wire's ●
V
end that is connected to
the PE CN10

Fig. 3-15 Wiring CCI

2. Wiring connections analog output terminal

If the analog output terminals AO1 and AO2 are connected to analog meters, then various kinds of physical values can
be indicated. The jumper can select current output (0/4~20mA) and voltage output(0/2~10V). The wiring is shown in
Fig.3-16..
Analog current
Analog
output
meter
0/4-20mA
AO1 ●
· · ·

0-10V
EV2000 AO2 ●

Anlog voltage
output
GND ●

0/4-20mA
· · ·

0-10V
AO1：CN16；AO2：CN17

Fig. 3-16 Wiring analog output terminal

Notes:
(1) When using analog input, a common mode inductor can be installed between VCI and GND or CCI and GND.
(2) Analog input and output signals are easily disturbed by noise, so shielded cables must be used to transmit these signals and
the cable length should be as short as possible.
3. Wiring of Serial Communication Port
Wire connections of serial communication port.
EV2000 drive provides two kinds of serial ports: RS232 and RS485 which can be selected by Jumper CN14.
Wire as following figures show, and a “single-master single slave” system or a “single-master multi-slaves” system can
be formed. The drives in the network can be monitored and controlled remotely and automatically in real time by using a
PC or PLC controller. Thus more complicated operation control can be realized (e.g. Unlimited multi-step PLC
operation).
① The drive connects to the host via its RS232 port:

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

26 Chapter 3 Installation and Wiring

Control PC
EV2000
RS232（DB9）
RS232 port Shielded Signal Pin
cable
Function Terminal ●

PE Enclosure
Transmit TXD
RXD 2
Receive RXD
TXD 3
GND GND
GND 5
The kilobit of FF.00 DTR 4
is set to 0 ●

DSR 6
RS232
···
RI 9
RS485 CD 1
●

CN14 RTS 7
CTS 8

Fig. 3-17 RS232-RS232 communication cables

② Connection between the drive’s RS485 port and the host PC:
Control PC
RS232（DB9）
RS485/RS232 converter
EV2000 Shielded
Function Terminal Signal Pin
RS485 port cable
5V power ＋5V ●

PE Enclosure
···

RS232 Transmit TXD

RS485 Receive RXD RXD 2
CN14 Ground GND ● TXD 3
GND 5
Function Terminal Terminal Function DTR 4
－ RS485－ RS485－ － DSR 6
＋ RS485＋ RS485＋ ＋ RI 9
CD 1
RTS 7
CTS 8

Fig. 3-18 RS485-(RS485/RS232)-RS232 communication cable

③ Connect the drive to the host PC via a MODEM:

EV2000 MODEM

RS232 port Signal Pin

Func Terminal ●
PE Enclosure
Transmit TXD TXD 3
Receive RXD RXD 2
Ground GND GND 5 PC
● PSTN RS232
DTR 4 MODEM （PC or PLC）
The kilobit of FF.00
is set to 1 DSR 6 Telephone
network
RI 9
···

RS232
CD 1
RS485
RTS 7
CN14
CTS 8

Fig. 3-19 Wiring of RS232-(MODEM-PSTN-MODEM)-RS232 communication

④The drive’s RS485 port connects to PROFIBUS via the TDS-PA01(field bus made by ENPC):

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

 Chapter 3 Installation and Wiring 27

EV2000 TDS-PA01
RS485 port fieldbus
Connect to
Func Terminal Func Terminal PROFIBUS
Twisted
signal－Func RS485－ RS485－ A
cable
signal+ Func RS485＋ RS485＋ B
··· RS232
Be able to connect
RS485 1-32 RS485
CN14

EV2000 TDS-PA01

TD3000 TDS-PA01

Fig. 3-20 Wire connections of RS485-(TDS-PA01)-PROFIBUS communication

If several drives are connected in the network via RS485, the disturbance to the communication system increases, so
the wiring is especially important, you can connect the cables according to the figure below:

Fig. 3-21 Communication between PLC and the drive (the drive and motor are grounded well)

If the communication is still abnormal, then the following actions can be taken:
① Feed a separate AC supply to the PLC(or host PC) and isolate the AC supply;
② If RS485/RS232 conversion module is used, then the module should be powered by a separate power supply;
③ Mount magnetic core to the communication cable, reduce the carrier frequency if the field conditions permit.
2). Description of control terminals CN6 and CN7

Layout of CN6:
P24 Y1 Y2 CME COM DO P24 PLC X1 X2 X3 X4 COM X5 X6 FWD REV COM X7 X8 PE

Layout of CN7:
TA TB TC

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

28 Chapter 3 Installation and Wiring

Table 3-10 Functions of terminals of CN6 and CN7

Category Terminal Name Functions Specifications
Terminal for inputting run
FWD forward operation See the explanations of F7
Operation
command parameters for the commands of run
control
Terminal for inputting run forward and run reverse (common
terminals Optical-isolator input
REV reverse operation terminal: PLC)
command input resistance: R＝2kΩ
Multi -function input Maximum input
X1 frequency:200Hz
terminal 1
Input voltage range: 9~30V
Multi -function input
X2
terminal 2 P24
+24V

Multi -function input See section 5.8 Chapter 8 for the PLC +5V
X3
terminal 3 programmable multi-function digital
Multi -function input input terminal R
X4 Xi、FWD、REV
terminal 4 (Common terminal: PLC)
Multi- COM
Multi -function input
function X5
terminal 5
input
Multi -function input
terminal X6
terminal 6
Equivalent circuit of optical-
Multi -function input Terminals X7 and X8 can be used as
X7 isolator input is shown above.
terminal 7 common multi-function terminals
input resistance: R＝2kΩ
(same with X1~X6), they can also be
Max input frequency: 100kHz
used as high speed pulse input port.
Multi -function input (single phase)/50kHz (dual
X8 See section 5.8 Chapter 8 for details.
terminal 8 phase)
(Common terminal: PLC)
Input voltage range: 15~30V
Optical-isolator output
Open collector output
Y1 Multi-function digital output terminal Operating voltage range:9~30V
Multi-functi terminal 1
can be defined. See section 5.8 Max output current: 50mA
on output
Chapter 5 for details. (Common Refer to the explanations of
terminal Open collector output
Y2 terminal: CME) F7.10~F7.11 for the using
terminal 2
methods.
Multi-function pulse signal output
Multi-functi Output frequency range:
Open collector pulse terminal can be defined. See section
on output DO dependent on F7.32, and the
output terminal 5.8 Chapter 5 for details. (Reference
terminal Max frequency is 50kHz
ground: COM)
TA-TB: normally closed,
TA
TA-TC: normally open
Capacity of contacts:
TB AC250V/2A(COSΦ=1)
Relay’s Multi-function relay output terminal
AC250V/1A(COSΦ
output Output terminals of relay can be defined. See section 5.8
=0.4),DC30V/1A
terminals Chapter 5 for details.
Refer to the explanations of
TC F7.12 for the using methods.
Overvolt class of the input volt
at relay output terminal: II.

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

 Chapter 3 Installation and Wiring 29

Category Terminal Name Functions Specifications

Provide +24V power supply for Maximum output current:
P24 +24V power supply
external equipment. 200mA
Common terminal of Common terminal of X1~X8.,
Common terminal of multi-function
PLC multi-function input FWD and REV. PLC is isolated
input terminal (short circuit with P24)
terminal with P24.
Power Total 3 common terminals, which are
Common terminal of
supply COM used in conjunction with other
+24V power supply
terminals.
COM is isolated with CME and
Common terminal of multi-function
GND.
Common terminal of Y1 Y1 and Y2 output
CME
and Y2 output (Short circuit with COM by
manufacturer)
Grounding terminal connected to Connected to PE inside the
Shielding PE Shielded GND
shielding layer drive
1) Wire connections multi-function input terminals,
+24V
terminals FWD and REV: P24
EV2000 multi-function input terminal uses a full-bridge PLC
+5V

rectifying circuit as shown in Fig. 3-. PLC is the common

+ +
terminal of terminals X1~X8, FWD and REV. The current DC power
-
flows through terminal PLC can be pulling current, and R
-
also the feeding current. Wire connections X1~X8, FWD K X1、X2 . . . X8
and REV is flexible and the typical wiring is shown FWD、REV
COM EV2000
below:
A) Method 1 of connections (Dry contacts)
Fig. 3-23 Using an external supply
①If internal 24V power supply is used, the wiring is
shown in Figure 3-22. B). Method 2 of connections
①Drive’s internal +24V power supply is used and the
+24V
P24 external controller uses NPN transistors whose common
+5V emitters are connected, as shown in Figure 3-24.
PLC
External controller EV2000
power +
source P24 D2
+
●

R COM 24V DC 5V
- -
●

PLC
K X1、X2 . . . X8
●

FWD、REV 1 ● ●
FWD
COM EV2000

Fig. 3-22 Using internal 24V power supply 5V

②If an external power supply is used, then use the Wire

connections shown in Fig. 3-23. (be sure to disconnect 10 ● ●
X8
the cable between P24 and PLC)
COM
PE
●

shielded cable's end near the drive

should be connected to the PE

Fig. 3-24 Method 2 of connections(a)

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

30 Chapter 3 Installation and Wiring

②Drive’s internal +24V power supply is used and the

External controller EV2000
external controller uses PNP transistors whose common
emitters are connected, as shown in Figure 3-25 P24 D2
+24V DC
●

COM 5V
External controller EV2000 -
●

PLC
9~30V
●

●
COM P24 D2 +
●
+ FWD
● ●

COM 24V DC 5V 1 ●
- ●

-
●

●
PLC
●

1 ● ●
FWD
5V

5V 10 X8
● ●

PE
10 ● ●
X8 ●

shielded cable's end near the drive

should be connected to the PE
PE
●

shielded cable's end near the drive Fig. 3-27 Method 2 of connections (d)
should be connected to the PE

Fig. 3-25 Method 2 of connections(b) 2) Wire connections of multi-function output terminal

①Multi-function output terminals Y1 and Y2 can use the
③Use external power supply:
24V power supply inside the drive and the wiring mode
External controller EV2000
is shown in Figure 3-28..
P24 D2
+ 5V +24V
●

COM 24V DC
●

- P24 R
PLC
9~30V ●

●
+
1 - FWD
● ●

+5V Relay
Y1,Y2

5V

CME
10 ● ●
X8

PE
EV2000 COM
●

ground the shield near the drive

Fig. 3-28 Wire connections 1 of multi-function output terminal
Fig. 3-26 Method 2 of connections(c)
②Multi-function output terminals Y1 and Y2 can also
④Use external power supply:
use the 9~30V power supply outside the drive and the
wiring mode is shown in Fig.3-29.

+24V
P24
+5V DC 9～ 30V
Y1,Y2
+ -

Relay
CME

EV2000 COM

Fig. 3-29 Wire connections 2 of multi-function output

terminal
③Pulse output terminal DO can use the 24V power
supply inside the drive and the wiring is shown in
Fig.3-30.

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

 Chapter 3 Installation and Wiring 31

3.4 Installation Methods Compliant With

EV2000 +24V
P24 EMC Requirements
+5V +24V
4.7K The drive inevitably generates noise due to its high
DO switching frequency, so relevant EMC problems must be
solved so as to reduce the drive’s disturbance to
COM Digital
external equipment. This chapter deals with the
frequency installation methods compliant with EMC requirements
meter
from the aspects of noise suppression, field wiring,
grounding, leakage current and the using of power filter.
Fig. 3-30 Wiring 1 of output terminal DO
This chapter can be used as a reference for field
④Pulse output terminal DO can also use the external installation.
9~30V power supply and the wiring is shown in Fig.3-31.
3.4.1 Noise Suppressing
EV2000 +24V
P24 The noise generated by the drive may disturb the
+5V +24V equipment nearby. The degree of disturbance is
4.7K
dependent on the drive system, immunity of the
DO
+ equipment, wiring, installation clearance and earthing
-
9～30V
methods.
COM
Digital frequency 1. Noise categories
meter
Noise
Fig. 3-31 Wiring 2 of output terminal DO

3) Wiring relay output terminals TA, TB and TC. ESD induction Ttransmission noise Electro-magnetic
Conduction noise
Noise in space induction noise
If the drive drives an inductive load (such as relay or
...

...
Route①
contactor), then a surge suppressing circuit should be Route ⑦,⑧

added, such as RC snub circuit (pay attention that the

leakage current must be smaller than the holding current Earthing Transmission noise
noise of power cables
of the controlled relay or contactor) and varistor or a
...
...

Route② Route③
free-wheeling diode (used in the DC electric-magnetic Radiation Radiation
Radiation noise noise noise
circuit and pay attention to the polarity during of motor of power of power
cables cables
...

installation). Snubbing components should be as close

...

...

Route④ Route⑤
to the coils of relay or contactor as possible. Route⑥

Fig. 3-32 Noise categories

Notes:
1. Don’t short circuit terminals P24 and COM, otherwise 2. Noise propagation paths
the control board may be damaged.
2. Please use multi-core shielded cable or multi-stranded
cable(above 1mm) to connect the control terminals.
⑧
3. When using a shielded cable, the shielded layer’s end Phone

that is nearer to the drive should be connected to PE. ③

4. The control cables should be as far away(at least 20cm) ⑤
③

from the main circuits and high voltage cables as possible ⑥

⑤
(including power supply cables, motor cables, relay cables Sensor's
Drive ④
power supply Radio Meter
and cables of contactor). The cables should be vertical to
①
each other to reduce the disturbance to minimum. ⑦

5. The resistors R in Fig. 3-27 and Fig.3-28 should be Sensor ④

Motor
removed for 24V input relays, and the resistance of R ②
should be selected according the parameters of relay for
non-24V relay. Fig. 3-33 Noise transmission paths

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

32 Chapter 3 Installation and Wiring

3. Basic methods of suppressing the noise Noise

Table 3-11 Basic methods of suppressing the noise emission Actions to reduce the noise
Noise paths
emission Actions to reduce the noise Don’t route the signal cables in parallel
paths with the power cables or bundle these
When the external equipment forms a cables together because the induced
loop with the drive, the equipment may electro-magnetic noise and induced ESD
suffer nuisance tripping due to the drive’s noise may disturb the signal cables.
②
earth leakage current. The problem can Other equipment should also be located
be solved if the equipment is not as far away as possible from the drive.
grounded. The signal cables should be placed
If the external equipment shares the ①⑦⑧ inside a metal tube and should be placed
same AC supply with the drive, the as far away as possible from the
drive’s noise may be transmitted along input/output cables of the drive. The
its input power supply cables, which may signal cables and power cables should
cause nuisance tripping to other external be shielded cables. EMC interference
③ equipment. Take the following actions to will be further reduced if they could be
solve this problem: Install noise filter at placed inside metal tubes. The clearance
the input side of the drive, and use an
between the metal tubes should be at
isolation transformer or line filter to
least 20cm.
prevent the noise from disturbing the
external equipment.
3.4.2 Field Wire Connections
If the signal cables of measuring meters,
radio equipment and sensors are
Control cables, input power cables and motor cables
installed in a cabinet together with the
should be installed separately, and enough clearance
drive, these equipment cables will be
should be left among the cables, especially when the
easily disturbed. Take the actions below
cables are laid in parallel and the cable length is big. If
to solve the problem:
(1)The equipment and the signal cables the signal cables must go through the power cables,
should be as far away as possible from they should be vertical to each other.
the drive. The signal cables should be The motor cables should be derated if they are too long
shielded and the shielding layer should or their cross sectional area (CSA) is too big. The drive’s
be grounded. The signal cables should cables should be the cables with specified CSA (See
be placed inside a metal tube and should Table 3-1) because the capacitance of the cable to
be located as far away as possible from ground is in proportional to the cable’s CSA. If the cable
the input/output cables of the drive. If the with big CSA is used, its current should be reduced.
signal cables must cross over the power
Shielded/armoured cable: High frequency low
④⑤⑥ cables, they should be placed at right
impedance shielded cable should be used. For example:
angle to one another.
Copper net, aluminum net or iron net.
(2) Install radio noise filter and linear
noise filter (ferrite common-mode choke)
at the input and output of the drive to
suppress the emission noise of power
lines.
(3) Motor cables should be placed in a
tube thicker than 2mm or buried in a
cement conduit. Power cables should be
placed inside a metal tube and be
grounded by shielding layer (Motor cable
should be a 4-core cable, where one
core should be connected to the PE of
the drive and another should be
connected to the motor’s enclosure).

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

 Chapter 3 Installation and Wiring 33

Motor cable Shared earthing pole (good)

>30cm >50cm
Other
Drive equipment
Power cable
PE
>20cm

Signal/Control cable

Power source or motor cable Fig. 3-38 Earthing diagram 2

Shared earthing cable(not good)

Signal/Control cable

Other
Fig. 3-34 Wire connections Drive equipment
Generally, the control cables should be shielded cables
PE
and the shielding metal net must be connected to the
metal enclosure of the drive by cable clamps.

PE PE

Fig. 3-39 Earthing diagram 3

enclosure enclosure
Other
Drive equipment
Fig. 3-35 Correct shielding method of shielding layer

PE（G）
PE

PE
enclosure enclosure
Fig. 3-40 Earthing diagram 4
Fig. 3-36 Incorrect earthing method of shielding layer
Besides, pay attention to the following points:
In order to reduce the earthing resistance, flat cable
3.4.3 Earthing should be used because the high frequency impedance
of flat cable is smaller than that of round cable with the
Independent earthing poles (best) same CSA.
For 4-core motor cable, the end of one cable should be
Drive Other
equipment connected to the PE of the drive, and the other end
should be connected to the motor’s enclosure. If the
PE motor and the drive each has its own earthing pole, then
the earthing effect is better.
If the earthing poles of different equipment in one
system are connected together, then the leakage current
Fig. 3-37 Earthing diagram 1 will be a noise source that may disturb the whole system.
Therefore, the drive’s earthing pole should be separated
with the earthing pole of other equipment such as audio
equipment, sensors and PC, etc.
In order to reduce the high frequency impedance, the
bolts used for fixing the equipment can be used as the

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

34 Chapter 3 Installation and Wiring

high frequency terminal. The paints on the bolt should and relays falsely activated. The higher the drive’s
be cleaned. carrier wave frequency, the bigger the leakage current,
The earthing cable should be as short as possible, that also, the longer the motor cable, the greater the leakage
is, the earthing point should be as close to the drive as current,
possible. Suppressing methods:
Earthing cables should be as far away from the I/O Reduce the carrier wave frequency, but the motor noise
cables of the equipment that is sensitive to noise, and may be louder;
also should be as short as possible. Motor cables should be as short as possible;
The drive and other equipment should use leakage
3.4.4 Installation Requirements of Relay, Contactor and
current circuit breaker designed for protecting the
Electro-magnetic Braking Kit product against high-order harmonics/surge leakage
current;
The devices such as relay, contactor and
electro-magnetic braking kit, which may generate great Leakage current between lines
noises, should be installed outside of the drive cabinet The line leakage current flowing through the distribution
and should be installed with surge suppressors. capacitors of the drive out side may cause the thermal
relay falsely activated, especially for the drive whose
Varistor
power is lower than 7.5kW. When the cable is longer
220VAC than 50m, the ratio of leakage current to motor rated
current may be increased that can cause the wrong
Diode action of external thermal relay very easily.
Inverter
+24VDC Suppressing methods:
Reduce the carrier wave frequency, but the motor noise
RC-Filter
may become louder;
Install reactor at the output side of the drive.
220VAC
In order to protect the motor reliably, it is recommended
to use a temperature sensor to detect the motor’s
Fig. 3-41 Relay, contactor and electro-magnetic braking kit
temperature, and use the drive’s over-load protection
device(electronic thermal relay) instead of an external
3.4.5 Leakage Current thermal relay.

Leakage current may flow through the drive’s input and

3.4.6 Correct EMC Installation
output capacitors and the motor’s capacitor. The
leakage current value is dependent on the distributed Divide the installation space into different areas
capacitance and carrier wave frequency. The leakage
current includes ground leakage current and the leakage In driving system, the drive, control equipment and
current between lines. sensors are installed in the same cabinet, the noise
Distributed
should be suppressed at the main connecting points
capacitor
AC supply QF between lines
with the RFI filter and input reactor installed in cabinet to
R
satisfy the EMC requirements.
S Drive Motor
The most effective but expensive measure to reduce the
T
Capacitor interference is to isolate the noise source and the noise
between
motor and receiver, which should be considered in
Distributed earth
capacitor between mechanical/system design phase. In driving system, the
cable and earth
noise source can be drive, brake unit and contactor.
Fig. 3-42 Flowing path of leakage current Noise receiver can be automation equipment, coder and
sensor.
Ground leakage current
The mechanical/system is divided into different EMC
The ground leakage current can not only flow into the area according to its electrical characteristics. The
drive system, but also other equipment via earthing recommended installation positions are shown in the
cables. It may cause the leakage current circuit breaker following figure:

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

 Chapter 3 Installation and Wiring 35

Mains
Electrical installation of the drive
Area Ⅴ
Electric cabinet

Input filter
10kV
Power
Area Ⅰ transformer

Area Ⅲ
Control
equipment Input reactor
Isolation Power
（Such as: PC） transformer source
>20cm cable of
Area Ⅱ Inverter Manufacturing inverter
mechanics Power
source cable Filter
of meters
Sensor（such as: Motor Mechanical Circuit breaker
Area Ⅳ
system >30cm
temperature, position, Linear noise
pressure） filter Area Ⅵ AC input reactor
PLC or
Earthing Metal Metal
meters
separation cabinet cabinet
board
Motor cables
Inverter
Detecting signal cable
Control cable
Fig. 3-43 Recommendation of Installation space
Motor cable

Attention: >50cm
AC Output
reactor
· Area Ⅰshould be used to install transformers of
control power supply, control system and sensor. Motor

·Area Ⅱ should be used for interfaces of signal and

control cables, correct immunity level is required. Fig. 3-44 Installation of the drive
· Area Ⅲ should be used to install noise sources such ·Motor cable should be earthed at the drive side, if
as input reactor, the drive, brake unit and contactor. possible, the motor and drive should be earthed
·Area Ⅳ should be used to install output noise filter separately;
and the wires of filter. ·Motor cable and control cable should be shielded or
·Area Ⅴ should be used to install power source and armored. The shield must be earthed and avoid
cable connecting parts of RFI filter. entangling at cable end to improve high frequency noise
·Area Ⅵ should be used to install motor and motor immunity.
cables. ·Assure good conductivity among plates, screw and
·Areas should be isolated in space, so that metal case of the drive; use tooth-shape washer and
conductive installation plate;
electro-magnetic decoupling effect can be achieved.
Generally, if there are some sensitive equipment, it is
·The minimum distance between areas should be 20cm.
more cost-effective to install the power filter at sensitive
·Earthing bars should be used for decoupling among equipment side.
areas, the cables from different area should be placed in
different tubes. 3.4.7 Application of Power Line Filter
·The filter should be installed at the interfaces between
different areas if necessary. Power source filter should be used in the equipment that
may generate strong EMI or the equipment that is
·Bus cable(such as RS485) and signal cable must be
sensitive to the external EMI. The power source filter
shielded
should be a two-way low pass filter through which only
50Hz current can flow and high frequency current should
be rejected.
Function of power line filter
The power line filter ensures the equipment can satisfy
the conducting emission and conducting sensitivity in
EMC standard. It can also suppress the radiation of the
equipment.

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

36 Chapter 3 Installation and Wiring

It can prevent the EMI generated by equipment from the case, the earthing is useless for high frequency
entering the power cable, and prevent the EMI interference. When the frequency is high, so is the
generated by power cable from entering equipment. impedance of cable, hence there is little bypass effect.
Common mistakes in using power cable filter The filter should be mounted on the enclosure of
equipment. Ensure to clear away the insulation paint
1. Too long power cable
between the filter case and the enclosure for good
The filter inside the cabinet should be located near to earthing contact.
the input power source. The length of the power cables
should be as short as possible. 3.4.8 EMI of The Drive
2. The input and output cables of the AC supply filter are
too close The drive’s operating theory decides that its EMI is
The distance between input and output cables of the unavoidable.
filter should be as far apart as possible, otherwise the The drive is usually installed in a metal cabinet, the
high frequency noise may be coupled between the instruments outside the metal cabinet is disturbed by the
cables and bypass the filter. Thus, the filter will become drive lightly. The cables are the main EMI source, if you
ineffective. connect the cables according to the manual, the EMI
3. Bad earthing of filter can be suppressed effectively.
The filter’s enclosure must be earthed properly to the If you install the drive and other control equipment in
metal case of the drive. In order to be earthed well, one cabinet, the area rule must be observed. Pay
make use of a special earthing terminal on the filter’s attention to the isolation between different area, cable
enclosure. If you use one cable to connect the filter to layout and shielding.

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

 Chapter 4 Operation Instructions 37

Chapter 4 Operation Instructions

setting methods, which involves the concept of main and
4.1 Notice auxiliary reference frequency.
Main reference frequency: set by F0.00, multi-speed
In the follow-up sections, you may encounter the terms (MS) or close loop control.
describing the control, running and status of drive many The main reference frequency is decided by the priority
times. Please read this section carefully. It will help you of running mode. The priority level is Jog>close
to understand and use the functions to be discussed loop>PLC>MS (multi-speed)>common running, e.g. if
correctly. the drive is running in MS mode, the primary reference
frequency is MS frequency.
4.1.1 The Drive’s Control Modes
Auxiliary reference frequency: set by F9.01~F9.04.

It defines the physical channels by which drive receives Preset frequency: the sum of main and auxiliary
operating commands like START, STOP, FWD, REV, frequency multiply a factor, which is set in F9.05 and
JOG and others. F9.06. Please refer to F9.05, F9.06 and Fig. 5-59 in
chapter 5.
Panel control: The drive is controlled by RUN, STOP
and JOG keys on the operation panel;
4.1.3 Operating Status
Terminal control: The drive is controlled by terminals
FWD, REV and COM (2-wire mode), or by terminal Xi There are 3 operating status: stopping, motor
(3-wire mode); parameters auto-tuning, and operating.
Host control: The operations such as START and STOP Stopping status: After the drive is switched on and
can be controlled by host PC. initialized, if no operating command is accepted or the
The control modes can be selected by parameter F0.03, stopping command is executed, then the drive enters
PANEL/REMOTE key and ENTER/DATA key on the stopping status.
operation panel and multi-function input terminal (No.27, Operating status: The drive enters operating status after
28 and 29 can be selected by F7.00~F7.07). it receives the operating command.

Warning: Motor parameters auto-tuning status: If there is an

operating command after FH.09 is set to 1 or 2, the drive
The user must ensure that the control mode selected is
then enters motor parameters auto-tuning status, and
suitable for the application. Wrong selection of control
then enters stopping status after auto-tuning process is
mode may cause damage to equipment or human injury!
over.

4.1.2 Reference Selector

4.1.4 Operating Modes
In common operating modes, EV2000 has 6 possible
EV2000 has 5 kinds of operating modes which can be
ways to input reference frequency, the reference
sequenced according to the priority: Jog>Close loop
frequency can be input by:
operation>PLC operation>Multi-step speed
▲ and ▼ keys on the panel; operation>Simple operation, as shown in Fig. 4-1.
Terminals UP/DN; Jog:
Serial port; When the drive is in stopping status, it will operate
Analog VCI; according to Jog frequency after it receives the Jog
Analog CCI; operation command(or after the JOG key is pressed).
Pulse terminal (PULSE) See explanations of F3.13~F3.16 for details.
Close-loop operation:
How to set Frequency
If the close-loop operating function is enabled(F5.00=1),
The output frequency is decided after calculating the
the drive will select the close-loop operation mode, that
values from one or more of the above 6 frequency
is, it will perform PI regulation according to the reference
and feedback values (See explanations of Parameter

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

38 Chapter 4 Operation Instructions

F5). Close-loop operating function can be disabled by a Multi-step (MS) speed operation:
multi-function terminal (No.20 function), and the drive Select MS frequency 1~7(F3.23~F3.29,F7.00~F7.07) to
will select an operating mode with a low priority. start MS speed operation by the ON/OFF combinations
PLC operation: of the multi-function terminals (No.1, 2, and 3), if none of
If PLC function is enabled (ones place of F4.00 is set to the terminals are “OFF”..
a non-zero value), the drive will select PLC operating Simple operation:
mode and will operate in the pre-defined operating mode Simple operation is actually the open-loop operation
(see explanation of parameter F4). The PLC function mode.
can be disabled by a multi-function terminal (No. 21 EV2000 operating status is shown in Fig. 4-1:
function), and the drive will select an operating mode of
lower priority.
Start up

Stop

Y Jog operation
High priority Jog ?
N

N
Run command active
Y

Close-loop setting Y
active (F5.00>0)?

Y Terminal for disabling N Close loop

N close-loop operation operation
enabled?
Y
PLC setting active?

N Y Terminal for disabling N PLC operation

PLC enabled?

Y Run at preset
Preset freq.enabled
frequence
N
Low priority
Common
operation

Fig. 4-1 Operating status of EV2000

Five operating modes provide 5 basic frequency sources. Except the Jog operating frequency, other 4 kinds of
frequency sources can be superposed by the auxiliary frequency to tune the final output frequency. In PLC, MS and
common mode, the reference frequency can be used as traverse frequency.

4.2 Operating Instructions

4.2.1 Using Operation Panel

The operation panel is used to setup the drive and display parameters. There are two types of operation panels, one
with LED display and the other, LCD display. The LED display is the standard operation panel. The LCD operation
panel is an optional accessory. It can display in English and Chinese characters, with description for the displayed data.
The outlines, dimensions and operating methods of these two types of operation panels are the same, as shown in
Fig.4-2.

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

 Chapter 4 Operation Instructions 39

PARAMETER
UNIT
Frequency unit:Hz
HZ

r/min
Rotating speed:r/min
4-bit LED
.
A %

m/s
Current unit:A
Line speed:m/s
V

Voltage unit:V
LCD display 补偿前频率
Freq. before compensation
普通运行
RUN 正
FWD Enter
Program Data input
Control mode indicator
MENU ENTER PANEL
ESC DATA REMOTE

Control mode selecting key

▲
▲
Move ▲ JOG Jog
Running Indicator
Stop
▲ STOP
RUN
RUN RESET
RESET
Run Reset

Increase/Decrease

Fig. 4-2 Illustration of operation panel

! Attention
Operation panel of EV2000 is not compatible with the panel of other Emerson variable speed drives.

Notes:
4.2.2 Function of Keys
Functions of RUN, JOG, STOP/RESET and
There are 9 keys on the operation panel of the drive and PANEL/REMOTE are also limited by F9.07.
the functions of each key is shown in Table 4-1.
Table 4-1 Function of operation panel 4.2.3 Function Descriptions of LED and Indicators
Key Name Function
Program/ Enter or exit programming The operation panel consists of a 4-digit seven
MENU/ESC segments display, 3 LED indicators that indicate unit
exit status
and 2 status indicators as shown in Fig. 4-3. The seven
Function/ Enter lower level menu or
ENTER/DATA segments can display the status parameters,
data confirm data
parameters and fault codes of the drive. These 3 unit
▲ Increase Increase data or parameter
indicators have 7 different combinations and each
▼ Decrease Decrease data or parameter
combination corresponds to one type of unit. The
In editing status, pressing relationship between the combination of the indicators
this key select the Bit to be and the unit is shown in Fig. 4-3:
XX Shift modified. In other status, this UNIT UNIT UNIT UNIT UNIT UNIT UNIT
Hz
key is used to scroll through Hz Hz Hz Hz Hz Hz

r/min r/min r/min r/min r/min r/min r/min

the parameters. A % A % A % A % A % A % A %
Control When a control mode is m/s m/s m/s m/s m/s m/s m/s
PANEL/ V V V V V V V
mode selected, press
REMOTE No Hz A V r/min m/s %
selection ENTER/DATA to enter unit
In panel control mode, press On Off
JOG Jog key this key to start Jog
Fig. 4-3 Unit represented by combination of the indicators
operation.
In panel control mode, press Two status indicators: Operating status indicator is
RUN Run key
this key to run the drive. above the RUN key. The control mode indicator is above
Press this key to stop or the PANEL/REMOTE key, and the functions of these
STOP/RESET Stop/reset
reset the drive. indicators are shown in Table 4-2.

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

40 Chapter 4 Operation Instructions

Table 4-2 Functions of status indicators commands via the control terminal X2 or serial port. The
Display Current status of the fault code will not disappear until the fault is cleared.
Indicator
status drive
PARAMETER UNIT
Operating status Off Stopping status HZ
Hz
r/min
indicator On Operating status A %
m/s
On Panel control status V

Terminal control
Control mode Off
status
indicator Input Phase Failure
Serial port control
Flash Pls Check
status

4.2.4 Display of the Drive Fig. 4-5 Alarm displaying status

EV2000 operation panel can display the parameters in 4. Parameter configuration

stopping, operating, editing and alarming state.
When the drive is in stopping, operating or alarming
1. Parameters displayed in stopping status state, pressing MENU/ESC can enter configuring status,.
When the drive stops operation, the panel will display Configuring status can be displayed in 3-level menu,
the status parameters in stopping status, as shown in they are: parameter group→pparameter→parameter
Fig. 4-4b. The unit indicator on the top right of the panel value. You can enter the sub-menus by pressing
indicates the unit of the parameter. ENTER/DATA. In parameter value menu, press
Other parameters can be displayed by pressing XX key ENTER/DATA to save the settings, and press
(see F8.03). MENU/ESC to exit the menu.

2. Parameters displayed in operating status

4.2.5 Panel Operation
When the drive receives operating command, it starts
running and its panel will display the status parameters 1. Viewing Parameters
in operating status, as shown in Fig.c of Fig. 4-4. The To view the parameters, press XX key. The parameters
unit indicator at right indicates the unit of the parameter. that can be displayed are different depending on the
Other parameters can be displayed by pressing XX key operation state (STOP, operating) and the settings of
(see F8.01 and F8.02). F8.01~F8.03)
PARAMETER UNIT PARAMETER UNIT PARAMETER UNIT
2. Parameter Setup
HZ HZ
HZ

Let’s look at an example of how to set parameters.

r/min r/min
r/min

A % A % A %
m/s m/s
m/s

V V
V

Suppose you want to change the setting of F3.13 from

EV2000
EV2000 Freq. precompensation
Preset frequency
ENYDRIVE
ENYDRIVE Stop
Common run Forward 5.00Hz to 6.50Hz.
1. Press MENU/ESC key to enter programming state,
MENU ENTER PANEL MENU ENTER PANEL MENU ENTER PANEL
ESC DATA REMOTE ESC DATA REMOTE ESC DATA REMOTE
the LED displays F0.
XX ▲ JOG XX ▲ JOG XX
▲ JOG

▲ ▲
2. Press ▲ key until “F3” is displayed.
▲ STOP
STOP
RUN
STOP
RUN
STOP
RUN
RUN RESET RUN RESET RUN RESET

3. Press ENTER/DATA key, you will see F3.00. Press

RESET RESET RESET

Fig. a Fig. b Fig. c

Initialize at power on, Stopping state, Stopping Running state, running
▲ key until “F3.13” is displayed.
all LED turns on information is displayed ; information is displayed;
RUN indicator turns off RUN indicator turns on 4. Press ENTER/DATA key, you will see “05.00”.
5. Press XXkey, to move the cursor to the digit “5”.
Fig. 4-4 Displayed during initialization, STOP, operation
Press ▲ key once, to change it to “6”. Press XXkey, to
3. Alarm information move the cursor to the next digit (from left to right) and
When the drive detects a fault signal, the panel will press ▲ key until the figure “5” appear.
display the fault code. The code will flash to catch your 6. Press ENTER/DATA key to save the modification and
attention as shown in Fig. 4-5; you will see the next parameter F3.14.
Reference frequency can be viewed by pressing the XX 7. Press MENU/ESC key to exit the programming state.
key in stopping status. Fault information can be queried
by pressing MENU/ESC key. The drive can be reset by
pressing the STOP/RESET key, or sending the reset

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

 Chapter 4 Operation Instructions 41

MENU ENTER Under panel control mode, press RUN key to start the
50.00 ESC F0 F3 DATA F3.00
drive and press STOP/RESET key to stop it. To switch
enter menu level 1
the control mode, please refer to the above paragraph.
XX ENTER 6. Jog
06.50
. 05.00 DATA F3.13
Save Not save enter menu level 3 enter menu level 2
When the drive is in STOP state, press JOG key and
ENTER MENU hold it, the panel will display start frequency and then
DATA ESC
the frequency will ramp to 5Hz. Keep pressing the key,
MENU MENU
F3.14 F3.13 ESC F3 ESC 50.00 the drive will jog at 5Hz.
MENU 7. Setting user’s password
ESC
F3 Enter menu level 3 and set FP.00 at a 4-digit figure as
Fig. 4-7 Setting the parameters your password. See the panel operation in Figure 4-7.

In menu level 3, the settings of the parameter cannot be 8. How to lock the panel:
changed if none digit of the parameter is flashing. The First set the hundred’s place of F9.07 at a non-zero
possible reasons are: figure, and then press MENU/ESC and ENTER/DATA at
1) The settings of this parameter cannot be changed, the same time.
such as the actual detected parameters or recorded MENU ENTER

parameters; 50.00 ESC F0 F9 DATA F9.00

2) The settings of this parameter cannot be changed

when the drive is operating, and can only be changed
XX ENTER
when the drive stops; 0020 0020 DATA F9.07
3) The parameters are protected, that is, if FP.01 is set
to 1 or 2, the settings of all the parameters cannot be
changed to avoid wrong operation. If you really want to ENTER MENU

change the settings, first set FP.01 to 0. 0120 DATA F9.08 ESC F9- 50.00

3. Fine Tuning reference frequency MENU

ENTER
DATA + ESC
Example: changing the reference frequency from 50.00
50.00Hz to 48.00Hz.
Just press ▼ key directly regardless of the current Fig. 4-8 Locking panel
display, the present frequency setting will appear and
9. How to unlock the panel
decrease 0.01Hz. Holding the key will speed up the
At stopping or operating state, press ENTER/DATA key,
decrease. Press ▲ key to increase the frequency by
and then press ▼ three times. Note that the operation
0.01Hz.
will not change the value of F9.07.
4. Changing the control mode:
Set F9.07 to “x1x” or “x2x”, and control mode is allowed Note:
changing. If F9.07 is set to “x1x”, the control mode can Even if the hundred’s place of F9.07 is not set to zero
be changed at STOP state; if set at “x2x”, the control (panel locking function is enabled), the panel is in
modes can be changed in both operation and STOP unlocking status every time the drive is powered on.
state.
PANEL/REMOTE key can be used to select the control 4.3 Start-up
mode both in operating status and stopping status.
Press this key and you can switch among panel control
mode, terminal control mode and serial port mode. 4.3.1 Checking before Start-up
When panel control mode is selected, the LED beside
Please wire the drive according to Section 3.3, and refer
the PANEL/REMOTE will turn on; when terminal control
to Fig. 3-7.
mode is selected, the LED will turn off; when serial port
control mode is selected, the LED will blink.
5. Starting and Stopping the drive

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

42 Chapter 4 Operation Instructions

4.3.2 Start up the Drive for the First Time

After checking the wiring and AC supply, switch on the

circuit breaker of the drive to supply AC power to it. The
drive’s panel will display “8.8.8.8.” at first, and then the
contactor closes. If the LED displays the frequency
settings, the initialization of the drive is completed.
If the LED on the PANEL/REMOTE is on, the drive is in
panel control mode.
Procedures of first-time start-up:

Start

Wiring according to section 3.3

N Connection is
correct?

Y
N Input volt is
correct?

Y
Switch on

Within 1s

N
Display 8.8.8.8.？

Within 2s Y
N
Contactor closes?

Within2 ~ 5s Y

Display freq.
N
setting?

Start-up fails
Y

Start-up
succeed Switch off

Check

Fig. 4-8 Procedures of starting the drive for the first-time

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

 Chapter 5 Parameter Introductions 43

Chapter 5 Parameter Introductions

Notes: A B C D

The values in “【】” are the factory settings. 0: Save preset freq. at power off
1: Not save preset freq. at power off

5.1 Basic Operating Parameters(Group F0)

0: Hold the stopping freq.
1: Stopping freq. recover to F0.02
F0.00 Reference frequency selector Range:0~5 【0】
Reserved
0:digital setting 1
To set the reference frequency via ▲ and ▼ keys on Reserved
the panel.
Fig. 5-1 LED setting
Initial frequency is the value of F0.02 and it can be
adjusted via ▲ and ▼ keys on the panel. Where,
1: digital setting 2 A: thousand’s place B: Hundred’s place
To set the reference frequency via terminal UP/DN C: Ten’s place D: Unit’s place
Initial frequency is the value of F0.02 and it can be Unit’s place of LED:
adjusted via terminal UP/DN. 0 (frequency setting can be saved at power off): When
2: digital setting 3 the drive is switched off or under voltage fault occurs,
To set the reference frequency via serial port the setting of F0.02 will be refreshed to the present
frequency value.
Initial frequency is the value of F0.02 and it can be
adjusted via serial port. 1 (frequency setting can not be saved at power off):
When the drive is switched off or under voltage fault
3:VCI analog input (VCI-GND)
occurs, the setting of F0.02 will not be changed.
The reference frequency is set by analog voltage input
Ten’s place of LED:
via terminal VCI and the input voltage range is DC
0~10V. 0 (Maintaining the frequency setting in stopping process):
When the drive is stopping, the frequency setting is the
4:CCI analog input(CCI-GND)
final frequency value.
The reference frequency is set by analog voltage or
1 (frequency setting is refreshed to the setting of F0.02):
current input via terminal CCI and the input range is DC
When the drive is stopping, the frequency setting will be
0~10V(if jumper CN10 is placed at "V” side) or
refreshed to the setting of F0.02 automatically.
DC0~20mA(if jumper CN10 is placed at "I” side).
Range: Lower limit of
5: Pulse input (PULSE) F0.02 Set the operating
frequency ~upper limit of
Set the reference frequency by pulse input via pulse frequency in digital mode
frequency【50.00Hz】
terminal (can only be input via terminal X7 or X8, see
When the reference frequency is set in digital
the definitions of F7.06~F7.07). Input pulse signal:
voltage range: 15~30V; frequency range:0~50.0kHz. mode(F0.00＝0, 1, 2), this setting of F0.02 is the drive’s
initial frequency value.
Note: F0.03 Methods of inputting
Range: 0. 1. 2 【0】
Frequency calculating methods of Modes 3, 4 and 5 are operating commands
decided by F1.00~F1.11, please refer to section 5.2. EV2000 has 3 control modes (Methods of inputting
F0.01 Digital frequency control Range: 00~11 【00】 operating commands)

Only valid when F0.00=0, 1 or 2. 0: Panel control: Input operating commands via panel
Start and stop the drive by pressing RUN, STOP and
JOG on the panel.
1: Terminal control: Input operating commands via
terminals

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

44 Chapter 5 Parameter Introductions

Use terminals FWD, REV, JOGF and JOGR to start and 1: Type P (fan & pump load)
stop the drive. EV2000 series drive of 45kW or below uses the type G
2: Serial port control: Input commands via serial port and type P integrated mode. The power of motor
Use serial port to start and stop the drive. matched with the drive type G is lower than that of type
P. Please refer to Table 2-2 for details.
Notes
The factory setting of the drive is set to type G.
Please be careful that during operating, the control modes For example: EV2000-4T0055G/0075P drive’s factory
can be changed through F0.03 or external terminals or setting is 5.5kW type G drive. If the drive needs to be
PANEL/REMOTE key. changed to 7.5kW type P drive, then:
F0.04 Set running direction Range: 0, 1 【0】
①set this parameter to 1
This function is active in panel control mode and serial
②set group FH parameters again
port control mode, and inactive in terminal control mode.
0: Forward Note:
1: Reverse Follow the same procedures if the drive needs to be
Range: Max{50.00,F0.12 upper changed from type P to type G.
F0.05 Max output
limit of frequency}~650.00Hz F0.09 Torque boost Range:0~30.0％【0.0％】
frequency
【50.00Hz】 In order to compensate the torque drop at low frequency,
F0.06 Basic the drive can boost the voltage so as to boost the torque.
Range:1.00~650.00Hz 【50.00Hz】
operating frequency If F0.09 is set to 0, auto torque boost is enabled and if
F0.07 Max output Range:1~480V 【drive’s rating F0.09 is set non-zero, manual torque boost is enabled,
voltage values】 as shown in Fig. 5-3.
Max output frequency is the highest permissible output Output
voltage
frequency of the drive, as shown in Fig. 5-2 as fmax; Vmax
Basic operating frequency is the Min frequency when
the drive outputs the max voltage, as shown in Fig. 5-2
as fb
Max output voltage is the drive’s output voltage when Vb
Output
the drive outputs basic operating frequency, as shown in freq.
Fig. 5-2 as Vmax fz fb
Output Vb : Manual torque boost Vmax: Max output voltage
voltage
f z : Cut-off freq. for torque boost
Vmax f b : Basic operating freq.
Fig. 5-3 Torque boost(shadow area is the boosted
value)

Note:
Output
frequency
1. Wrong parameter setting can cause overheat or
fL f b f H f max over-current protection of the motor.
2. Refer to F0.21 for definition of fz.
Fig. 5-2 Characteristic parameters
3. When the drive drives a synchronous motor，torque boost
The fH and fL are defined by F0.12 and F0.13 as upper function is recommended to be used and V/F curve should
limit of frequency and lower limit of frequency be adjusted according to the motor parameters.
respectively. Range:0.1~3600s(min)【6.0s/20.0s】
F0.10 Acc time 1
Note: F0.11 Dec time 1 Range:0.1~3600s(min)【6.0s/20.0s】
Please set fmax, fb and Vmax according to motor
parameters, otherwise the equipment may be damaged.
F0.08 Drive type selection Range:0. 1【0】
0: Type G (load with constant torque)

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

 Chapter 5 Parameter Introductions 45

Output F0.20 V/F voltage value V1 Range:0~F0.18【0.0%】

frequency
f max This group of parameters define the V/F setting modes
of EV2000 so as to satisfy the requirements of different
loads. 3 preset curves and one user-defined curve can
be selected according to the setting of F0.14.
If F0.14 is set to 1, a 2-order curve is selected, as shown
Time in Fig. 5-5 as curve 1;
If F0.14 is set to 2, a 1.7-order curve is selected, as
t1 t2
shown in Fig. 5-5 as curve 2;
Fig. 5-4 Acc/Dec time definition If F0.14 is set to 3, a 1.2-order curve is selected, as
Acc time is the time taken for the motor to accelerate shown in Fig. 5-5 as curve 3;
from 0Hz to the maximum frequency (as set in F0.04), The above curves are suitable for the variable-torque
see t1 in Fig. 5-4. loads such as fan & pumps. You can select the curves
Dec time is the time taken for the motor to decelerate according to the actual load so as to achieve best
from maximum frequency (F0.05) to 0Hz, see t2 in Fig. energy-saving effects.
Output voltage (V)
5-4.
EV2000 series drive has defined 4 kinds of Acc/Dec V max
time. Here only Acc/Dec time 1 is defined, and Acc/Dec
time 2~4 will be defined in F3.17~F3.22, please refer to
section 5.4.
0
Note: 32
1
1. Unit(second/minute) of Acc/Dec time 1~4 is dependent
on the setting of F9.09, and the default unit is second. Output frequency (Hz)

2. For the drive of 30kW or above, the factory setting of 0 fb

Acc/Dec time is 20.0s.
F0.12 upper limit of Range: Lower limit of frequency V max : Max output voltage(F0.07)
frequency f b : Basic operating frequency(F0.06)
~Max output frequency【50.00Hz】
F0.13 lower limit of Range:0~upper limit of frequency Fig. 5-5 Torque-reducing curve
frequency 【0.00Hz】
If F0.14 is set to 0, you can define V/F curve via
F0.12 and F0.13 define the upper and lower limit of F0.15~F0.20, as shown in Fig. 5-6. The V/F curve can
frequencies respectively, as shown in Fig. 5-2 as fH and be defined by connecting 3 points of (V1,F1), (V2,F2)
f L. and (V3, F3), to adapt to special load characteristics.

Notes: Default V/F curve set by factory is a direct line as show

in Fig. 5-5 as curve 0.
Actual output frequency is possible to exceed ±2.5Hz in Voltage (%)
the bus-voltage control process.
F0.14 V/F curve setting Range: 0~3【0】
100%
Range: F0.17~F0.06
F0.15 V/F frequency value F3 V3
【0.00Hz】
V2
Range: F0.18~100.0%
F0.16 V/F voltage value V3
【0.0%】
Range: F0.19~F0.15 V1
F0.17 V/F frequency value F2
【0.00Hz】
Range: F0.20~F0.16
F0.18 V/F voltage value V2 F1 F2 F3 Fb Freq Hz
【0.0%】
V1~V3: Voltage of sections 1~3
Range: 0~F0.17 F1~F3: Freq of sections 1~3
F0.19 V/F frequency value F1 Fb: Basic operating freq. of F0.06
【0.00Hz】
Fig. 5-6 V/F curve defined by user

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

46 Chapter 5 Parameter Introductions

F0.21 Cut-off point used for Positive and negative characteristics are shown in Fig.
Range:0~50%【10.0%】
manual torque boost 5-8.
F0.21 defines the ratio of the cut-off frequency used for Reference freq. Reference freq.

manual torque boost to the basic operating f max f max

frequency(defined by F0.06), as shown in Fig. 5-3 as fz.
This cut-off frequency adapts to any V/F curve defined f min f min
by F0.14.
Pmax P Pmin Pmax P
5.2 Parameters of Reference Frequency A max A A min A max A
(1) Positive (2) Negative
(Group F1) A:Reference of analog signal
P: pulse terminal input
of VCI or CCI
Pmin A min : Min. reference
F1.00 Reference frequency Pmax Amax: Max. reference
Range:000~111【000】 f min : Freq.corresponding f max : Freq.corresponding
curve selection to Min reference
to Max reference
F1.01 Gain of reference Range:0.00~9.99
frequency selector 【1.00】 Fig. 5-8 Output frequency curve

F1.02 Reference constant of Range:0.01~50.00s Analog input value(A) is a percentage without unit, and
filter 【0.50s】 100% corresponds to 10V or 20mA. Pulse frequency(P)
Range:0.1~50.0kHz is also a percentage without unit, and 100%
F1.03 Max input pulse frequency
【10.0kHz】 corresponds to the Max pulse frequency defined by
Range:0.0%~100.0% F1.03.
F1.04 Min reference of curve 1
【0.0%】 F1.02 defines the time constant of the filter used by the
F1.05 Frequency corresponding Range:0.0~650.0Hz reference selector. The input signal is filtered and the
to the Min reference of curve 1 【0.00Hz】 bigger the time constant, the higher the immunity level,
but the response time is prolonged with the increase of
Range:0.0%~100.0%
F1.06 Max reference of curve 1 the time constant. That is, the smaller the time constant,
【100.0%】
the shorter the response time, but the lower the
F1.07 Frequency corresponding Range:0.0~650.0Hz
immunity level.
to the Max reference of curve 1 【50.00Hz】
F1.00 is used to select the output frequency curve when
Range:0.0%~100.0% VCI, CCI or PULSE input is selected, as shown in
F1.08 Min reference of curve 2
【0.0%】 Fig.5-9.
F1.09 Frequency corresponding Range:0.0~650.0Hz
A B C D
to the Min reference of curve 2 【0.00Hz】
Range:0.0%~100.0% VCI frequency curve selection
F1.10 Max reference of curve 2 0 : Curve 1
【100.0%】
0 : Curve 2
F1.11 Frequency corresponding Range:0.0~650.0Hz
to the Max reference of curve 2 【50.00Hz】 CCI frequency curve selection
0 : Curve 1
When VCI or CCI or pulse input(PULSE) is selected, the 0 : Curve 2
relationship between reference and the preset frequency
is given below: PULSE frequency curve selection
0 : Curve 1
Ref. Filter Amplify A Set Freq. curve
selection Preset frequency 0 : Curve 2
F1.02 F1.01 P or select F1.00
F0.00
Reserved
Fig. 5-7 Relationship between reference and the preset
Fig. 5-9 Frequency curve selection
frequency
Where,
Reference frequency signal is filtered and amplified, and
then its relationship with the preset frequency is A: thousand’s place B: Hundred’s place
determined by Curve 1 or 2. Curve 1 is defined by C: Ten’s place D: Unit’s place
F1.04~F1.07, and curve 2 is defined by F1.08~F1.11. For example, the requirements are:

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

 Chapter 5 Parameter Introductions 47

①Use the pulse signal input via terminal to set the Brake first(refer to F2.03 and F2.04), and then start in
reference frequency; mode 0.
②Range of input signal frequency:1kHz~20kHz; 2. Start on the fly

③1kHz input signal corresponds to 50Hz reference Search and catch the motor’s running direction and
speed, start the rotating motor smoothly without impact,
frequency, and 20kHz input signal corresponds to 5Hz
as shown in Fig. 5-11.
reference frequency;
AC supply
According to the above requirements, the parameter On OFF ON

settings are: Motor speed

①F0.00=5, select pulse input to set the reference 0

frequency; Drive's
output freq. Run reverse
②F7.06=45, input pulse signal via terminal X7; without load
Forward
③F1.00=100, select curve 2; Drive's running
direction
④F1.03=20.0kHz, set the Max input pulse frequency to Reverse

20kHz; Detect motor's speed

and direction
⑤F1.08=1÷20×100%=5.0%, the minimum reference of
Fig. 5-11 Start on the fly
curve 1 is actually the percentage of 1kHz to
20kHz(F1.03);
Notes:
⑥F1.09=50.00Hz, set the frequency that corresponds to
1. Starting mode 1 is suitable for starting the motor that is
the Min reference (1kHz pulse signal);
running forward or reverse with small inertia load when the
⑦F1.10=20÷20×100%=100.0%, the Max reference of drive stops. For the motor with big inertial load, it is
curve 2 is actually the percentage of 20kHz to recommended to use starting mode 2;
20kHz(F1.03); 2. The starting performance of starting mode 2 is dependent
⑧F1.11=5.00Hz, set the frequency that corresponds to on the motor’s parameters. Please set the parameter group
the Max reference (20kHz pulse signal); FH correctly.
3. Starting mode 0 is recommended when the drive drives a
Output frequency
synchronous motor.
F1.09=50 Range:0.20~60.00Hz
F2.01 Starting frequency
【0.50Hz】
F2.02 Holding time of starting
Range:0.0~10.0s【0.0s】
F1.11=5 frequency
Starting frequency is the initial frequency when the drive
Pulse signal input starts, as shown in Fig. 5-12 as fS; Holding time of
F1.08=5 F1.10=100
starting frequency is the time during which the drive
operates at the starting frequency, as shown in Fig. 5-12
F0.00=5, F1.00=100, F1.03=20, F7.06=45 as t1
Frequency
Fig. 5-10 Pulse signal input Hz

5.3 Starting and Braking Parameters fmax

(Group F2)

F2.00 Starting mode Range:0. 1. 2【0】 fs

0: Start from the starting frequency
Start at the preset starting frequency (F2.01) within the t1
Time

holding time of starting frequency (F2.02).

Fig. 5-12 Starting frequency and starting time
1:Brake first and then start

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

48 Chapter 5 Parameter Introductions

Notes: Frequency

Starting frequency is not restricted by the lower limit of

frequency.
f max
F2.03 DC injection braking Range: dependent on
current at start drive’s model【0.0%】
F2.04 DC injection braking Range: dependent on
time at start drive’s model【0.0s】 Time
t1 t2
F2.03 and F2.04 are only active when F2.00 is set to 1
(starting mode 1 is selected), as shown in Fig. 5-13. Fig. 5-14 Linear Acc/Dec

The range of DC injection braking current and time are Frequency

dependent on the drive’s model, see Table 5-1.

3
DC injection braking current at start is a percentage f max 3

value of drive’s rated current. There is no DC injection 2 2

braking when the braking time is 0.0s.
1 1
Table 5-1 DC injection braking function
The range The range of t2 Time
t1
Model
of current time
Fig. 5-15 S-ramp Acc/Dec
G型 0～100.0％ 0.0～30.0s
P型 0～80.0％ 0.0～30.0s Note:
Output In auto Acc/Dec mode, settings of F0.10, F0.11 and
frequency
F3.17~F3.22 are invalid.
F2.06 Starting time of S ramp Range:10~50%【20.0%】
F2.07 Rising time of S ramp Range:10~80%【60.0%】
Time
F2.06 and F2.07 are only active when the Acc/Dec
Output Braking mode is S-ramp Acc/Dec mode(F2.05=1), and
voltage energy
（effective F2.06+F2.07≤90%.
value）
Time Starting process of S-shape curve is shown in Fig. 5-15
DC injection
as “①” , where the change rate of output frequency
braking time increases from 0;
Running
command Rising process of S-shape curve is shown in Fig. 5-15
Fig. 5-13 Starting mode 1 as “②”, where the output frequency’s changing rate is
constant;
F2.05 Acc/Dec mode Range:0. 1. 2【0】
Ending process of S-shape curve is shown in Fig. 5-15
0: Linear Acc/Dec mode
as “③”, where the changing rate of output frequency
Output frequency increases or decreases according to a decreases to 0;
constant rate, as shown in Fig. 5-14.
S-ramp Acc/Dec mode is suitable for the conveying load
1: S ramp Acc/Dec such as elevator and conveying belt.
Output frequency increases or decreases according to a F2.08 Stopping mode Range:0. 1. 2【0】
S-shape curve, as shown in Fig. 5-15.
0: Dec-to-stop
2: Acc/Dec mode with current limiting function
After receiving the stopping command, the drive reduces
The drive can maintain its output current below the
its output frequency according to the Dec time, and
current limiting threshold (see FL.07) automatically and
stops when the frequency decreases to 0.
complete the Acc or Dec process according to the load
1: Coast-to-stop
condition.
After receiving the stopping command, the drive stops
outputting power immediately and the motor stops under
the effects of mechanical inertia.

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

 Chapter 5 Parameter Introductions 49

2: Dec-to-stop+DC injection braking Note:

After receiving the STOP command, the drive reduces DC injection braking current at stop(F2.11) is a percentage
its output frequency according to the Dec time and starts value of drive’s rated current.
DC injection braking when its output frequency reaches Range:0,1【0】
F2.13 Dynamic braking
the initial frequency of braking process.
0: Dynamic braking is disabled
Refer to the introductions of F2.09~F2.12 for the
1: Dynamic braking is enabled
functions of DC injection braking.
F2.09 DC injection braking Range:0.00~60.00Hz Note:
initial frequency at stop 【0.00Hz】
This parameter must be set correctly according to the actual
F2.10 DC injection braking Range:0.00~10.00s conditions, otherwise the control performance may be
waiting time at stop 【0.00s】 affected.
F2.11 DC injection braking Range: dependent on F2.14 Ratio of working time of braking Range:0.0~
current at stop drive’s model【0.0%】 kit to drive’s total working time 100.0%【2.0%】
F2.12 DC injection braking Range: dependent on This function is effective for the drive with built-in braking
time at stop drive’s model【0.0s】 resistor.
DC injection braking waiting time at stop: The duration
Note:
from the time when operating frequency reaches the DC
injection braking initial frequency(F2.09) to the time Resistance and power of the braking resistor must be taken
when the DC injection braking is applied. into consideration when setting this parameters.
The drive has no output during the waiting time. By
setting waiting time, the current overshoot in the initial 5.4 Auxiliary Operating Parameters
stage of braking can be reduced when the drive drives a (Group F3)
high power motor.
F3.00 Anti-reverse running function Range:0. 1【0】
The range of DC injection braking current and time are
dependent on drive’s model, see Table 5-2. 0: disabled
DC injection braking current at stop is a percentage of 1: enabled
drive’s rated current. There is no DC injection braking
Note:
when the braking time is 0.0s.
This function is effective in all control modes.
Table 5-2 DC injection braking function
Braking Braking time F3.01 Delay time of run
Model Range:0~3600s【0.0s】
current at stop at stop reverse/forward
G型 0～100.0％ 0.0～30.0s The delay time is the transition time at zero frequency
P型 0～80.0％ 0.0～30.0s when the drive switching its running direction as shown
in Fig. 5-17 as t1.
Output
Output Freq. frequency

Initial Freq.of braking

Time
Output

volt Waiting time

t1
Braking
（RMS value） Energy
Fig. 5-17 Delay time from reverse running to forward
Braking time running or from forward running to reverse running

Operating
F3.02~F3.04 Reserved
command Reserved.
Fig. 5-16 Dec-to-stop + DC injection braking F3.05 auto energy-saving function Range:0. 1【0】
0:disabled
1: enabled

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

50 Chapter 5 Parameter Introductions

When the motor operates without load or with light load, Range of slip compensation: limit of slip
the drive can adjust its output voltage by detecting the compensation(F3.08) × rated slip(FH.08)
load current to achieve the energy-saving effects.
Note:
Note:
The value of automatically compensated slip is dependent
This function is especially useful for the fan & pump loads. on the motor’s rated slip, therefore the motor’s rated slip
F3.06 AVR function Range:0. 1. 2【2】 must be set correctly (FH.08).
0:disabled F3.10 Carrier wave Range:0.7~15.0kHz【depend on
frequency drive model】
1: enabled all the time
2: disabled in Dec process Table 5-3 Drive’s type and carrier wave frequency (CWF)
AVR means automatic voltage regulation. CWF Highest Lowest Factory
The function can regulate the output voltage and make it Type (kHz) (kHz) setting (kHz)
constant. Therefore, generally AVR function should be
enabled, especially when the input voltage is higher than Type G:5.5kW~45kW
15 3 8
the rated voltage. Type P:7.5kW~55kW
Type G:55kW~90kW
In Dec-to-stop process, if AVR function is disabled, the 10 1 3
Type P:75kW~110kW
Dec time is short but the operating current is big. If AVR
function is enabled all the time, the motor decelerates Type G:110kW~220kW
6 0.7 2
steadily, the operating current is small but the Dec time Type P:132kW~280kW
is prolonged. Table 5-4 CWF characteristics
F3.07 Gain of slip CWF Decrease Increase
Range:0.0~300.0%【100.0%】
compensation Motor’s noise ↑ ↓
F3.08 Limit of slip Leakage current ↓ ↑
Range:0.0~250.0%【200.0%】
compensation
Disturbance ↓ ↑
F3.09 Compensation
Range:0.1~25.0s【2.0s】
time constant Notes:
The motor’s slip changes with the load torque, which In order to achieve better control performances, the ratio of
results in the variance of motor speed. The drive’s carrier frequency to the maximum operating frequency of
output frequency can be adjusted automatically through the drive should not be less than 36.
slip compensation according to the load torque.
F3.11 Auto adjusting of CWF Range:0. 1【1】
Therefore the change of speed due to the load change
is reduced as shown in Fig. 5-18. 0: disabled
Slip 1: enabled
When this function is enabled, the drive can adjust the
CWF automatically according to the internal temperature
Positive slip
compensation of the drive. At this time, the drive’s actual Max CWF is
restricted by F3.10.
-100%
Motor's load F3.12 Motor tone adjustment Range:0~10【0】
100%
F3.12 can be used to adjust the motor’s tone, and is
Negative slip only effective for the CWF below 6kHz.
compensation
If this parameter is set to 0, the function is disabled.
Fig. 5-18 Auto slip compensation F3.13 Jog operating Range:0.10~50.00Hz
frequency 【5.00Hz】
Motoring status: Increase the gain of slip compensation
F3.14 Interval of Jog
gradually when the actual speed is lower than the Range:0.0~100.0s【0.0s】
operation
reference speed (F3.07).
F3.15 Acc time of Jog Range:0.1~60.0s
Regenerating status: Increase the gain of slip operation 【6.0s/20.0s】
compensation gradually when the actual speed is higher
F3.16 Dec time of Jog Range:0.1~60.0s
than the reference speed (F3.07).
operation 【6.0s/20.0s】

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

 Chapter 5 Parameter Introductions 51

F3.13~F3.16 define the relevant parameters of Jog Note:

operation.
1. Acc/Dec time 1 is defined in F0.10 and F0.11.
As shown in Fig. 5-19, t1 and t3 are the actual Acc time 2. For the drive of 30kW or above, its factory setting of
and Dec time respectively. t2 is the Jog operating time; t4 Acc/Dec time is 20.0s.
is the interval of Jog operation(F3.14); f1 is the Jog F3.23 Preset Range: Lower limit of frequency
operating frequency(F3.13). frequency 1 ~upper limit of frequency【 5.00Hz】
Actual Acc time t1 can be determined by the following F3.24 Preset Range: Lower limit of frequency
formula, so does the actual Dec time t3 of jog operation. frequency 2 ~upper limit of frequency【10.00Hz】
F3.13×F3.15
t1= F3.25 Preset Range: Lower limit of frequency
F0.05 frequency 3 ~upper limit of frequency【20.00Hz】
Frequency f1 F3.26 Preset Range: Lower limit of frequency
frequency 4 ~upper limit of frequency【30.00Hz】
F3.27 Preset Range: Lower limit of frequency
frequency 5 ~upper limit of frequency【40.00Hz】

t3 Time F3.28 Preset Range: Lower limit of frequency

t1 t2 t4 frequency 6 ~upper limit of frequency【45.00Hz】
F3.29 Preset Range: Lower limit of frequency
Jog command Jog command frequency 7 ~upper limit of frequency【50.00Hz】
These frequencies will be used in simple PLC operation
and multi-step speed operation, refer to the introductions
Time
of F7.00~F7.07 and group F4 parameters.
Fig. 5-19 Jog operating parameters Range:0.00~650.00Hz
F3.30 Skip frequency 1
Interval of Jog operation (F3.14) is the interval from the 【0.00Hz】
time when the last Jog operation command is ended to F3.31 Range of skip Range:0.00~30.00Hz
the time when the next Jog operation command is frequency 1 【0.00Hz】
executed. Range:0.00~650.00Hz
F3.32 Skip frequency 2
The jog command sent during the interval will not be 【0.00Hz】
executed. If this command exists until the end of the F3.33 Range of skip Range:0.00~30.00Hz
interval, it will be executed. frequency 2 【0.00Hz】
Range:0.00~650.00Hz
Note: F3.34 Skip frequency 3
【0.00Hz】
1. In Jog operation process, the drive starts according to
F3.35 Range of skip Range:0.00~30.00Hz
starting mode 0 and stops according to stopping mode 0.
frequency 3 【0.00Hz】
The unit of Acc/Dec time is second.
2. Jog operation can be controlled by panel, terminals and F3.30~F3.35 define the output frequency that will cause
serial port. resonant with the load, which should be avoided.
F3.17 Acc time 2 Range: 0.1~3600s(min) 【6.0s/20.0s】 Therefore, the drive will skip the above frequency as
shown in Fig. 5-2020. Up to 3 skip frequencies can be
F3.18 Dec time 2 Range: 0.1~3600s(min) 【6.0s/20.0s】
set.
F3.19 Acc time 3 Range: 0.1~3600s(min) 【6.0s/20.0s】
F3.20 Dec time 3 Range: 0.1~3600s(min) 【6.0s/20.0s】
F3.21 Acc time 4 Range: 0.1~3600s(min) 【6.0s/20.0s】
F3.22 Dec time 4 Range: 0.1~3600s(min) 【6.0s/20.0s】
Three kinds of Acc/Dec time can be defined, and the
drive’s Acc/Dec time 1~4 can be selected by different
combinations of control terminals, refer to the
introductions of F7.00~F7.07 for the definitions of
terminals used to select Acc/Dec time.

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

52 Chapter 5 Parameter Introductions

Adjusted preset
frequency A B C D
Skip
frequency 3 Skip
PLC operating mode selection
range 3
0: No action
1: Hold final value after 1-cylce running
Skip 3: stop after single cycle
Skip
frequency 2 4: continuous operation
range 2
PLC restarting mode selection:
Skip Skip range 1 0: Restart from 1st stage
frequency 1 Preset 1: Continue to run at the frequency in the stafe
frequency when the drive stopes
2: Continue to run at the frequency when the
drive pauses
Fig. 5-20 Skip frequency and skip range
Save PLC operating parameters upon power
outage:
5.5 PLC Operating Parameters(Group F4) 0: No save
1: Save the frequency and running stage upon
power outage
Simple PLC function can enable the drive change its
operating frequency and directions automatically Unit of running time:
0: Second
according to the operating time to satisfy the 1: Minute
manufacturing requirements. Before, this function is
realized by PLC, now the drive itself can realize such Fig. 5-22 Simple PLC operation mode
function, as shown in Fig. 5-21.
Where,
Simple PLC operation
f6
d7 A: thousand’s place B: Hundred’s place
f2 a6 f7
a2 f5 C: Ten’s place D: Unit’s place
f1 d7
a1 d3 a5 Unit’s place: PLC operation mode

a3 f 3 0:disabled
a4 d5 PLC operation mode is disabled.
f4
1: Stop after single cycle
T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 As shown in Fig. 5-23, the drive stops automatically after
one cycle of operation and will start when receiving RUN
command again.
Indicating signal for complating f6
500ms d7
one stage of PLC operation a6 f7
f 2
Indicating signal for completing a a2
f5 d7
cycle of PLC operation
a1 f 1 d3 a5
Fig. 5-21 Simple PLC operation
a3 f 3 d5
In Fig. 5-21, a1~a7 and d1~d7 are the Acc time and Dec a4
f4
time in different stages. f1~f7 and T1~T7 will be defined in
the following parameters.
T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7
Bi-direction open-collector output terminals Y1 and Y2 or
the relay that output the 500ms pulse can indicate the
completion of PLC operation, refer to the introductions of RUN
F7.10~F7.12. command

F4.00 Simple PLC operation Fig. 5-23 Stopping mode after single cycle of PLC
Range: 0000~1123【0000】
mode
2: Maintain the final value after single cycle of operation
As shown in Fig. 5-24, the drive will maintain the
operating frequency and direction of last stage after
completing one cycle of operation.

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

 Chapter 5 Parameter Introductions 53

f6 Stopping signal
d7
f a6 f7
a2
2
Output freq.Hz f1
f5 d2
f1 d3 a5 a1
a1 ... f 3 ...
f2 a3
a3 f 3 d5
a4 a2 Time
f4
Stage 1 Operating Remnant time of
T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 time of stage 2
stage 2

a 1: Acc time of stage 1 a 2: Acc time of stage 2

RUN a 3: Acc time of stage 3 d 2: Dec time of stage 2
command f 1: Freq. of stage 1 f 2 : Freq. of stage 2
f 3: Freq. of stage 3
Fig. 5-24 Maintaining the frequency after single cycle
Fig. 5-26 PLC start mode 1
3 (continuous operation): See Fig. 5-25, the drive will
start next cycle of operation automatically after 2: Continue to operate at the frequency when the drive
completing one cycle of operation until receiving STOP stops
command. When the drive stops during PLC operation due to
f6 f6 receiving STOP command or fault, it will record the
f2 f7 f2 f7 operating time and the current frequency. It will continue
f5 f5 d1
running at the recorded frequency from the stage where
f1 f1
f1 it just stops upon restart, as shown in Fig. 5-27.
PLC d1d2
operation Note:
f3 f3
The difference between mode 1 and mode 2 is that in mode
f4 f4 2, the drive can record the operating frequency when the
T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T1
drive stops and will run at the recorded frequency after
First cycle Second cycle ...
restart.
Stopping signal
RUN
command Output freq. Hz f1
a1 d2
STOP
a3 f 3 ...
command ... d2
a2 f2
Fig. 5-25 Continuous operation of PLC
Operating Time
Tens’ place: Restart after PLC operation pause Stage 1 Remnant time of
time of stage 2
0: Operate from first section stage 2
a 1: Acc time of stage 1 a 2 : Acc time of stage 2
If the drive stops during PLC operation due to receiving a 3: Acc time of stage 3 a 2 : Dec time of stage 2
STOP command, fault or power failure, it will run from f 1 : Freq. of stage 1 f 2 : Freq. of stage 2
f 3 : Freq. of stage 3
the first stage after restarting.
1: Continue from the stage where the drive stops Fig. 5-27 PLC starting mode 2

When the drive stops during PLC operation due to Hundred’s place: Store the PLC status after power
receiving STOP command or fault, it will record the failure
operating time and will continue from the stage where 0: Not save
the drive stops after restart at the frequency defined for The drive does not save the PLC operating status after
this stage, as shown in Fig. 5-26. power failure and start operating in first stage after
restart.
1: Save
Memorize the operating parameters of PLC operation
after power failure, including the operating stage,
operating frequency, and operating time. The drive will
continue to operate in the mode defined by the ten’s
place.

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

54 Chapter 5 Parameter Introductions

Thousand’s place: time unit

A B C D
0: Second
Frequency setting
1: Minute 0: Preset frequency i
This unit is only valid for defining the PLC operating time. 1: Determined by F0.00
2: Preset close-loop reference i
The unit of Acc/Dec time in PLC operation is determined
3: Determined by F5.01
by F9.09.
Running direction selection
Note: 0: Forward
1: Reverse
1. The stage is ineffective if the time of this stage of PLC 2: Determined by operating
command
operation is set to 0.
2. You can use terminals to pause and disable PLC Acc/Dec time selection
operation, and clear the memorized parameters. See the 0: Acc/Dec 1
1: Acc/Dec 2
introductions to group F7 parameters. 2: Acc/Dec 3
F4.01 Stage 1 setting Range: 000~323【000】 3: Acc/Dec 4

F4.02 Time of stage 1 Range: 0~6500s(min)【20.0s】 Reserved

F4.03 Stage 2 setting Range: 000~323【000】
Fig. 5-28 Settings of PLC stage I(i=1~7)
F4.04 Time of stage 2 Range: 0~6500s(min)【20.0s】
Where,
F4.05 Stage 3 setting Range: 000~323【000】
A: thousand’s place B: Hundred’s place
F4.06 Time of stage 3 Range: 0~6500s(min)【20.0s】
C: Ten’s place D: Unit’s place
F4.07 Stage 4 setting Range: 000~323【000】
Units’ place for setting stage i:
F4.08 Time of stage 4 Range: 0~6500s(min)【20.0s】
0: Select preset frequency i, for example: F4.01 sets the
F4.09 Stage 5 setting Range: 000~323【000】
parameter of stage 1, so the reference frequency is
F4.10 Time of stage 5 Range: 0~6500s(min)【20.0s】 preset frequency 1 set by F3.23. Please refer to
F4.11 Stage 6 setting Range: 000~323【000】 F3.23~F3.29 for definitions of preset frequencies.
F4.12 Time of stage 6 Range: 0~6500s(min)【20.0s】 1: The frequency is determined by parameter F0.00
F4.13 Stage 7 setting Range: 000~323【000】 2: Preset close-loop reference i, for example: F4.03 sets
F4.14 Time of stage 7 Range: 0~6500s(min)【20.0s】 the parameter of stage 2, so the reference frequency is
close-loop frequency 2 set by F5.21. Please refer to
F4.01, F4.03, F4.05, F4.07, F4.09, F4.11 and F4.13 are
F5.20~F5.26 for definitions of preset close-loop
used to configure the operating frequency, direction and
reference.
Acc/Dec time of each PLC operating stage. These
functions are all selected by digits, as shown in Fig. 5-28. 3: Determined by Parameter F5.01
The 7 stages of PLC can correspond to MS or close PLC can realize close-loop operation in a certain stage.
loop running. Close-loop reference selectors can be preset close-loop
reference i or determined by parameter F5.01; and the
feedback is determined by F5.02. When the reference
selector is determined by parameter F5.01, the terminals
can be selected via preset close-loop reference. See
F7.00~F7.07 and F5.20~F5.26 for details.

Note:
When the PLC operating direction is determined by
operating commands, the direction of the motor can be
controlled by external terminals. For example: to run
forward by closing FWD-COM terminal, and run reverse
by closing REV-COM. If no command is given, the drive
will run in the direction of last stage.

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

 Chapter 5 Parameter Introductions 55

5.6 Close-loop Control Parameters(Group F5) 0(4)~20mA current signal. The reference signal and
feedback signal are detected by the analog channel.
There are two kinds of close loop control: analog The start and stop of the drive can be controlled by
close-loop control (feedback value is analog value) and terminal FWD.
pulse close-loop control (feedback value is pulse). Fig. The above system can also use a TG (speed measuring
5-29 and 5-30 show the typical wiring of analog generator) in close speed-loop control
close-loop control and pulse close-loop control Close speed-loop using PG:
respectively. A close speed-loop control system uses external control
terminals X7 and X8, and pulse generator(PG).
EV2000
QF As shown in Fig. 5-30, reference of speed close-loop
R U
3-phase V Output
S M P can be input by a potentiometer in the form of voltage
380V T W
PE Water- signal via terminal VCI, while the feedback value of the
level
sensor close loop is input by PG in pulse mode via terminals X7
. FWD .
P24 and X8. The start and stop of the drive can be controlled
. CCI . by terminal FWD.
COM
VRF . In Fig. 5-30:
. GND .
VCI 1-3K A and B are PG’s dual phase quadrature output;
GND.
P24 is connected to the power source of PG;

Fig. 5-29 Analog feedback control system with internal PI Speed reference is the voltage signal of 0~10V. The
voltage signal is in direct proportion to synchronous
QF EV2000 A/A speed n0 that corresponds to 0~Max frequency (F0.05),
R U
3-phase V M PG
PG supply and fmax is Max frequency (F0.05), and P is the number
S B/B
380V W of poles of motor(FH.00).
T PE
PG GND n0=120×fmax/P
· VRF FWD·
Refer to F7.00~F7.07 for the functions of input terminals
1-3K · VCI
COM· X7 and X8.
· GND
X7·
P24· Note:
X8·
1. The reference can also be input via panel or serial port;
2. Dual-phase input is good for improving the speed
measurement accuracy, while the wiring of single-phase
Fig. 5-30 Wiring of speed close-loop with PG input circuit is simple;
Analog feedback control system: 3. Dual-phase pulse can only be input in quadrature mode;
4. If using the drive’s terminal P24 to supply the power to
An analog feedback control system uses a water-level
PG, then the Max load current of optical PG must be less
sensor as the feedback sensor of the internal PI.
than 100mA.
As shown in Fig. 5-29, pressure reference (voltage
signal) is input via terminal VCI, while the feedback Operating principles of internal PI of EV2000 is shown in
pressure value is input into terminal CCI in the form of the Fig. 5-301.

KP ×
ε
(F5.12)
Reference
+ ε Error limit Regulation +
Reference Output
regulation (F5.15) (F5.16)
+
(F5.08 and F5.10) - ∑ Ki ×
ε
(F5.13)
Feedback
regulation Feedback
(F5.09 F5.11)

Fig. 5-31 PI block diagram

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

56 Chapter 5 Parameter Introductions

In the above Fig., KP: proportional gain; Ki: integral gain After the control type is determined, follow the
In Fig. 5-31, refer to F5.01~F5.15 for the definitions of procedures below to set close loop parameters.
close-loop reference, feedback, error limit and Determine the close-loop reference and feedback
proportional and Integral parameters. channel (F5.01 and F5.02);
There are two features of internal PI of EV2000: The relationship between close-loop reference and
The relationship between reference and feedback can feedback value (F5.08~F5.11) should be defined for
be defined by F5.08~F5.11. close-loop control;
For example: In Fig. 5-29, if the reference is analog For speed close-loop, the close-loop speed reference
signal of 0~10V, the controlled value is 0~1MP, and the and the number of revolutions of PG (F5.06~F5.07)
signal of water-level sensor is 4~20mA, then the need to be determined;
relationship between reference and feedback is shown Determine the close-loop regulation characteristic, i.e.
in Fig. 5-32. whether the motor speed increase with the reference.
Feedback Please see F5.16.
20mA Set up the integral regulation function and close-loop
frequency presetting function (F5.17~F5.19);
Adjust the close-loop filtering time, sampling cycle, error
limit and gain(F5.12~F5.15).
F5.00 Close-loop control function Range:0. 1【0】
4mA
Reference 0: disabled
0 10V 1: enabled
F5.01 Reference selector Range:0. 1. 2【1】
Fig. 5-32 Reference and feedback
0: digital input
The reference value is a 0~10V signal (10V corresponds
Take the value of F5.05 (when the setting is analog
to 100%); and the feedback value is 4Ma~20mA (20mA
close-loop, F5.02＝0~5);
corresponds to 100%).
Take the value of F5.06 (when the setting is pulse
In Fig 5-31, “reference regulation” and “feedback
close-loop, F5.02＝6).
regulation” mean that the reference value and feedback
value are converted from current or voltage value to 1: VCI analog voltage input(0~10V)
percentage values, so that feedback value can be added 2: CCI analog input
to or subtracted from the reference value. Analog input range:0~10V(Jumper CN10 is placed at
Close-loop reference is selected via F5.16 to satisfy side V), or 0~20mA(Jumper CN10 is placed at side I).
different application requirements.
Note:
If the motor’s speed is required to increases with the
reference speed, this kind of control characteristic is Use pulse feedback to control the speed. If the reference is
called positive characteristic. If the motor speed is analog signal, then 0~10V (4~20mA) reference corresponds
required to decrease when the reference value to synchronous speed n0 (n0＝120fmax/P).
increases, this control characteristic is called negative
characteristic. F5.02 Feedback selector Range:0~6【1】
Please refer to Fig. 5-33 and F5.16. 0: VCI 0~10V analog voltage input
Speed Positive
1: CCI analog input
2: VCI + CCI
3: VCI-CCI
4: Min {VCI,CCI}
Negative
5: Max {VCI,CCI}
Settings of jumper CCI are the same with the above.
Close loop
reference
When current input is selected, the signal will be
converted into voltage signal by the formula:
Fig. 5-33 Close-loop control characteristic Voltage value = current value (mA)/2;

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

 Chapter 5 Parameter Introductions 57

6: pulse input Max reference

corresponding to
Both single-phase PG feedback and dual-phase PG
feedback value
feedback can be used. Refer to the definitions of
multi-function input terminal X7 and X8 (functions of
F7.06~F7.07).
F5.03 Reference filter Min reference
Range:0.01~50.00s【0.50s】
corresponding
F5.04 Feedback filter Range:0.01~50.00s【0.50s】 to feedback
value Min Max
Both the reference signal and feedback signal carry reference reference
noise. These signals can be filtered by setting the time
constant of filter (F5.03 and F5.04). The bigger the time (1) positive regulation of feedback
constant, the better the immunity capability, but the
Min reference
response becomes slow. The smaller the time constant, corresponding
the faster the response, but the immunity capability to feedback
becomes weak. value

F5.05 Digital setting of

Range:0.00~10.00V【0.00】 Max reference
reference corresponding to
When analog feedback is used (F5.02=0~5), this feedback value Min Max
function can realize digital setting of reference via panel reference reference
or serial port.
F5.06 Close-loop speed (2) negative regulation of feedback
Range:0~39000rpm【0 rpm】
reference
Fig. 5-34 Relationship between feedback and reference
If PG pulse feedback is used (F5.02=6), the speed
F5.12 Proportional gain KP Range:0.000~9.999【0.050】
reference can be set by panel or serial port
F5.07 Number of pulses per F5.13 Integral gain Ki Range:0.000~9.999【0050】
Range:1~9999【1024】
revolution of PG F5.14 Sampling cycle T Range:0.01~50.00s【0.50s】
The setting of F5.07 is determined by the parameters of The bigger the proportional gain of KP, the faster the
PG. response, but oscillation may easily occur.
Range:0.0%~ F5.10 If only proportional gain KP is used in regulation, the
F5.08 Min reference
【0.0%】 error cannot be eliminated completely. To eliminate the
F5.09 Feedback value error, please use the integral gain Ki to form a PI control
Range:0.0~ 100.0%
corresponding to the Min system. The bigger the Ki, the faster the response, but
【20.0%】
reference oscillation may easily occur if Ki is too big.
Range:F5.08~ 100.0% The sampling cycle T refers to the sampling cycle of
F5.10 Max reference
【100.0%】 feedback value. The PI regulator calculates once in
F5.11 Feedback value each sampling cycle. The bigger the sampling cycle the
Range:0.0~ 100.0%
corresponding to the Max slower the response.
【100.0%】
reference F5.15 Error limit Range:0.0~20%【2.0%】
F5.08~F5.11 define the relationship between the It defines the max. deviation of the output from the
close-loop reference and feedback value. The setting is reference, as shown in Fig. 5-35. PI regulator stops
the ratio (percentage value) of input and feedback value operation when the feedback value is within this range.
to reference (10V or 20mA). Setting this parameter correctly is helpful to improve the
system output accuracy and stability.

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

58 Chapter 5 Parameter Introductions

Feedback value
Error limit Output freq.
Ref
Preset freq.

time
Output
Freq Holding time of t (time)
preset freq.

Fig. 5-36 Preset frequency of close-loop operation

time
Note:
Fig. 5-35 Error limit
You can disable the function by set both F5.18 and F5.19 to
F5.16 Close-loop regulation 0.
Range:0. 1【0】
characteristic F5.20 Preset close-loop
Range:0.0~10.00V【0.00V】
0: Positive reference 1
Set F5.16 to 0 if the motor speed is required to be F5.21 Preset close-loop
Range:0.0~10.00V【0.00V】
increased with the increase of the reference. reference 2
1: Negative F5.22 Preset close-loop
Range:0.0~10.00V【0.00V】
Set F5.16 to 1 if the motor speed is required to decrease reference 3
with the increase of the reference. F5.23 Preset close-loop
Range:0.0~10.00V【0.00V】
F5.17 Integral regulation selection reference 4
Range:0. 1【0】
F5.24 Preset close-loop
0: Stop integral regulation when the frequency reaches Range:0.0~10.00V【0.00V】
reference 5
the upper and lower limits
F5.25 Preset close-loop
1: Continue the integral regulation when the frequency Range:0.0~10.00V【0.00V】
reference 6
reaches the upper and lower limits
F5.26 Preset close-loop
It is recommended to disable the integral regulation for Range:0.0~10.00V【0.00V】
reference 7
the system that requires fast response.
Among the close-loop reference selectors, besides the 3
F5.18 Preset close-loop Range:0.00~650.00Hz
selectors defined by F5.01, the voltage value defined by
frequency 【0.00Hz】 F5.20~F5.26 can also be used as the close-loop
F5.19 Holding time of reference.
Range:0.0~3600s【0.00s】
preset close-loop frequency Voltage of preset close-loop reference 1~7 can be
This function can make the close-loop regulation enter selected by terminals, refer to introductions to
stable status quickly. F7.00~F7.07 for details. These functions can also be
When the close-loop function is enabled, the frequency used in conjunction with PLC operating functions, see
will ramp up to the preset close-loop frequency (F5.18) introductions to group F4 parameters for details.
within the Acc time, and then the drive will start The priority preset close-loop reference control is higher
close-loop operation after operating at the preset than the reference selectors defined by F5.01.
frequency for certain time(defined by F5.19).

5.7 Traverse Operating Parameters (Group F6)

Traverse operation is widely used in textile and chemical fiber industry. The typical application is shown in Fig. 5-37.
Traverse operation process: First, the drive accelerates to the preset frequency of traverse operation (F6.02) within the
Acc time and then waits for certain time (F6.03). The drive transits to the central frequency within Acc/Dec time, and at
last the drive traverse according to the preset traverse amplitude (F6.04), jitter frequency(F6.05), traverse cycle(F6.06)
and rising time of traverse operation (F6.07) until it receives a stopping command and stops within Dec time.

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

 Chapter 5 Parameter Introductions 59

Operating
freq. (Hz) Traverse operation
amplitude Aw=Fset*F6.04
Upper limit of
freq. FH
+ Aw
Central Freq. Fset
Lower limit of freq. FL - Aw a1
Preset freq. Jitter
freq.=AW*F6.05

a1

Accelerate Waiting time

Rising t
according F6.03 time=F6.06*F6.07
Decelerate
to Acc time according
Traverse to Dec time
Run operating
cycle
command

stop
command

Fig. 5-37 Traverse operation

The central frequency is actually the preset frequency of simple operation (except PLC, traverse operation, jog),
multi-step speed operation or PLC operations;
Traverse operating function is disabled automatically in Jog operation or close-loop operation process.
If PLC operation and traverse operation start at the same time, the traverse operation is disabled when the drive transits
from one PLC operating stage to another stage. The drive will accelerate to the preset frequency of PLC operation and
then start traverse operation. The drive will decelerate to stop within the Dec time set in PLC operating stage.

F6.00 Traverse function selection Range:0~1【0】 A B C D

F6.00 decides whether the traverse operating function is
Start mode:
enabled 1: Auto start
0: disabled 2: Manual start mode

1: enabled
Range:0000~1111 Traverse operating amplitude control
F6.01 Traverse operating mode
【0000】 1: Variable amplitude
2: Fixed amplitude
F6.01 is used to set the traverse operating mode and
the meanings of LED display are shown in Fig. 5-38. Restart mode
1: Restart at the freq. and direction
memorized before stopping
2: Restart

Save parameters upon power outage

1: Save
2: Not save

Fig. 5-38 Traverse operating mode

Where,
A: thousand’s place B: Hundred’s place
C: Ten’s place D: Unit’s place
Unit’s place: start mode
0: auto mode

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

60 Chapter 5 Parameter Introductions

The drive will first operate at preset frequency of Note:

traverse operation (F6.02) for certain time (F6.03), and
The traverse operating frequency is restricted by the upper
then enter traverse mode automatically.
and lower limit of frequency. Traverse operation will be
1: Manual mode abnormal if the frequency is set incorrectly.
If the multi-function terminal (Xi is set to No.33 function) Range:0.0~50.0%(ratio to
is enabled, the drive will enter traverse mode. If the F6.05 Jitter frequency
amplitude)【0.0%】
terminal is disabled, the drive will end traverse operation
As shown in Fig. 5-37, there is no jitter frequency if
and operate at the pre-traverse frequency (F6.02).
F6.05 is set to 0.
Ten’s place: traverse operating amplitude F6.06 Traverse operating
Range:0.1~999.9s【10.0s】
0: variable amplitude cycle
Traverse operating amplitude AW changes with the F6.06 defines a complete cycle of traverse operation
central frequency and the change rate is defined by including rising and falling processes.
F6.04.
Note:
1: Fixed amplitude
In traverse mode, do not select auto Acc/Dec operating
Traverse operating amplitude AW is determined by Max
mode, otherwise the traverse operating cycle will be
frequency and F6.04.
abnormal.
Hundred’s place: start mode of traverse operation F6.07 Rising time of triangle
Range:0~100.0%【50.0%】
0: The drive starts and runs at the frequency and wave
direction before it stops Rising time of traverse operation＝F6.06×F6.07.
1: Restart Falling time of traverse operation＝F6.06×(1-F6.07)
Thousand’s place: saving the traverse operating The unit is second. Refer to Fig. 5-37.
parameters upon power outage
Note:
The traverse operating parameters can be saved when
You can select traverse mode and S curve at the same, thus
power outage occurs. The function is effective when the
the traverse operation is much more smoother.
hundred’s place is set at 0.
0: save
5.8 Function of Terminals(Group F7)
1: not save

Note: F7.00 Multi-function terminal X1 Range:0~43【0】

F7.01 Multi-function terminal X2 Range:0~43【0】
Terminal Xi (No. 34 function) can be used to reset the
traverse operating status. F7.02 Multi-function terminal X3 Range:0~43【0】
Range: 0.00Hz~650.0Hz F7.03 Multi-function terminal X4 Range:0~43【0】
F6.02 Pre-traverse frequency
【0.00Hz】 F7.04 Multi-function terminal X5 Range:0~43【0】
F6.03 Holding time of Range:0.0~3600.0s F7.05 Multi-function terminal X6 Range:0~43【0】
Pre-traverse frequency 【0.0s】 F7.06 Multi-function terminal X7 Range:0~47【0】
F6.02 is used to define the drive’s operating frequency F7.07 Multi-function terminal X8 Range:0~48【0】
before entering traverse mode.
The functions of multi-function input terminal X1~X8 are
If auto-start mode is selected, F6.03 is used to define extensive. You can select functions of X1~X8 according
the time when the drive operates at pre-traverse to your application by setting F7.00~F7.07. Refer to
frequency. If manual start mode is selected, F6.03 is Table 5-5.
disabled.
Table 5-5 Multi-function selection
Refer to Fig. 5-37. Setting Functions
F6.04 Traverse amplitude Range:0.0~50.0%【0.0%】 0 No function
variable amplitude: AW = central frequency × F6.04 1 Preset frequency 1
Fixed amplitude: AW = Max operating frequency 2 Preset frequency 2
F0.05×F6.04 3 Preset frequency 3
4 Acc/Dec time 1

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

 Chapter 5 Parameter Introductions 61

Setting Functions 1~3: setting speed reference

5 Acc/Dec time 2 Up to 8 speed references can be set through different
6 External fault signal normally-open input ON/OFF combinations of terminals K3, K2 and K1.
7 External fault signal normally-close input Table 5-6 On/Off combinations of terminals
8 RESET signal K3 K2 K1 Frequency setting
9 Forward jog operation
Common operating
10 External terminals for reverse jog operation OFF OFF OFF
frequency
11 Coast-to-stop(FRS) OFF OFF ON Preset frequency 1
12 Frequency ramp up (UP)
OFF ON OFF Preset frequency 2
13 Frequency ramp down(DN)
OFF ON ON Preset frequency 3
14 Pause the PLC operation
ON OFF OFF Preset frequency 4
15 Acc/Dec prohiBit
ON OFF ON Preset frequency 5
16 3-wire operation control
ON ON OFF Preset frequency 6
External interrupt signal normally-open
17 ON ON ON Preset frequency 7
input
The frequency references will be used in MS speed
External interrupt signal normally-close
18 operation and simple PLC operation. Take MS speed
input
operation for example:
19 DC injection braking command (DB)
20 Close-loop disabled Definitions of terminals X1, X2 and X3:
21 PLC disabled After setting F7.00 to 1, F7.01 to 2 and F7.03 to 3,
22 Frequency selector 1 terminals X1, X2 and X3 can be used in MS speed
23 Frequency selector 2 operation, as shown in Fig. 5-39.
speed7
24 Frequency selector 3 Output freq. speed6

Frequency reference is input via terminal speed5

25 speed4
CCI forcibly speed3

26 Reserved Common speed2

operating speed1
27 Terminal control mode is forcibly enabled freq.

28 Control mode selector 1

Speed Time
29 Control mode selector 2 command

30 Preset close-loop reference 1 K1

31 Preset close-loop reference 2 K2

32 Preset close-loop reference 3

K3
33 Start traverse operation
34 Reset the traverse operating status Fig. 5-39 Multi-step speed operation
35 External stop command
In Fig. 5-40, terminal control is selected. The operating
36 Reserved
direction can be controlled by K4 and K5. Common
37 Drive operation prohiBiting operating frequency and preset frequency 1~7 can be
38 Reserved selected through different On/Off combinations of K1, K2
39 Length clearing and K3.
40 Auxiliary reference frequency clearing
41 Reset PLC stopping status
42 Counter’s zero-clearing signal input
43 Counter’s trig signal input
44 Input the signal of length
45 Pulse input
46 Single-phase speed measuring input
Speed measuring input SM1(only set for
47
X7)
48 Speed measuring input SM2(only for X8)
Introductions to functions listed in Table 5-5:

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

62 Chapter 5 Parameter Introductions

EV2000 If the setting is 8, the drive can be reset via this terminal
QF R U when the drive has a fault. The function of this terminal
3-phase S V
M is the same with that of RESET on the panel.
AC W
T
supply PE 9~10: inputting jog operation signal (JOGF/JOGR)
If the setting is 9~10, this terminal can enable jog
k1
. X1
operation. JOGF is for inputting forward jog command
k2
. and JOGR is for reverse jog command. Jog frequency,
X2
k3 k4 interval and Acc/Dec time of jog operation are defined in
. FWD .
X3
k5
F3.13~F3.16.
. COM REW .
11: Coast-to-stop
COM .
If the setting is 11, the function of the terminal is the
same with that defined by F2.08. It is convenient for
remote control.
Fig. 5-40 Wiring for multi-speed operation
12~13: Frequency ramp UP/DN
4~5: selecting Acc/Dec time If the setting is 12~13, the terminal can be used to
Table 5-7 Acc/Dec time selection increase or decrease frequency. Its function is the same
Acc/Dec time with c and d keys on the panel, which enables remote
Terminal 2 Terminal 1
selection control. This terminal is enabled when F0.00=1 or
OFF OFF Acc time 1/Dec time 1 F9.01=2. Increase or decrease rate is determined by
OFF ON Acc time 2/Dec time 2 F7.09.
ON OFF Acc time 3/Dec time 3 14: pausing PLC operation:
ON ON Acc time 4/Dec time 4 If the setting is 14, the terminal is used to pause the PLC
Through the On/Off combinations of terminals, Acc/Dec operation and the drive operates at zero frequency when
time 1~4 can be selected. the terminal is enabled. There is no timing of PLC
6~7: inputting external fault signal (normally-open/close operation. If the terminal is disabled, the drive will start
input) on the fly and continue the PLC operation. Refer
F4.00~F4.14 to how to use this terminal.
If the setting is 6~7, the fault signal of external
equipment can be input via the terminal, which is 15: Acc/Dec prohibiting command
convenient for the drive to monitor the external If the setting is 15, the terminal can make the motor
equipment. Once the drive receives the fault signal, it operate at present speed without being influenced by
will display “E015”. The fault signal has two inputting external signal (except stopping command).
modes: normally-open and normally-close input.
Note:
This terminal is disabled in normal Dec-to-stop process.
KM
16: 3-wire operation control.
EV2000 Refer to F7.08, operation mode 2 and 3 (3-wire
· X5 operation mode 1 and 2).
· X6 17~18: inputting external stopping signal
(Normally-open/close input)
· COM
During operating, the drive stops its output and operates
at zero frequency when it receives external STOP signal.
Once the signal is removed, the drive will start on the fly
Fig. 5-41 Normally-open/close input
and resume normal operation.
As shown in Fig. 5-41, X5 is normally-open contact and There are two inputting modes of external stopping
X6 is normally-close command. KM is the relay for signal: normally-open and normally-close input. As
inputting external fault signal. shown in Fig. 5-41, X5 is normally-open contact and X6
8: inputting external reset signal is normally-close contact.

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

 Chapter 5 Parameter Introductions 63

Note: Terminal 3 Terminal 2 Terminal 1 Freq. selector

Different with No. 6~7 functions, the external stopping ON OFF ON CCI analog input
signal will not trigger alarm and the drive can resume PULSE terminal
ON ON OFF
normal operation after the signal is removed. input
PULSE terminal
19: DC injection braking signal ON ON ON
input
If the setting is 19, the terminal can be used to perform
25:Frequency reference is input via terminal CCI forcibly
DC injection braking to the motor that is running so as to
realize the emergent stop and accurate location of the If the setting is 25, the frequency reference will be input
motor. Initial braking frequency, braking delay time and via terminal CCI forcibly. The frequency selector will be
braking current are defined by F2.09~F2.11. Braking changed to the previous one if this terminal function is
time is the greater value between F2.12 and the disabled.
effective continuous time defined by this control 26:Reserved
terminal. 27: Terminal control mode is forcibly enabled
20: disabling close-loop function When this terminal function is enabled, the operating
If the setting is 20, the terminal can be used to realize command is input through this terminal forcibly, and the
the flexible switching between close-loop operation and drive will be controlled in previous control mode if
low level operating mode (refer to section 4.1.4 for FWD/REV terminal function is disabled.
details). 28~29: On/Off combinations of terminals 1 and 2 for
different control modes selection
Note:
Table 5-9 Control modes
The switching between operation modes is enabled only in
Terminal 2 Terminal 1 Control modes
close-loop operation (F5.00=1).
OFF OFF Hold the control mode
When the drive is switched to low level operating mode,
OFF ON Panel control mode
its start/stop, operating direction, ACC/Dec time should
ON OFF Terminal control mode
be compliant with corresponding operating modes.
ON ON Serial port control mode
21: disabling PLC
The control modes in Table 5-9 can be selected by the
If the setting is 21, the terminal is used to realize the
different On/Off combinations of terminals 1 and 2.
flexible switching between PLC operation and low level
30~32: Selecting preset close-loop reference
operating mode (refer to section 4.1.4 for details).
frequencies via On/Off combinations of terminals 1~3.
Note: Table 5-10 Preset close-loop reference selection
The switching between operation modes can be enabled Preset close-loop
Terminal 3 Terminal 2 Terminal 1
only in PLC operation (unit’s place of F4.00 is not 0). reference selection
When the drive is switched to low level operating mode, Close-loop reference
OFF OFF OFF
its start/stop, operating direction, ACC/Dec time should is decided by F5.01
be compliant with corresponding operating modes Preset close-loop
OFF OFF ON
accordingly. reference 1
Preset close-loop
22~24: Terminals 1~3 for reference frequency selector. OFF ON OFF
reference 2
Different ON/OFF combinations of terminals 1, 2 and 3
Preset close-loop
can select different reference frequency selectors as OF ON ON
reference 3
shown in Table 5-8. The drive will act to the command
Preset close-loop
from the terminal or F0.00, whichever comes late. ON OFF OFF
reference 4
Table 5-8 Frequency selector
Preset close-loop
Terminal 3 Terminal 2 Terminal 1 Freq. selector ON OFF ON
reference 5
OFF OFF OFF Hold the setting
Preset close-loop
OFF OFF ON Digital setting 1 ON ON OFF
reference 6
OFF ON OFF Digital setting 2
Preset close-loop
OFF ON ON Digital setting 3 ON ON ON
reference 7
ON OFF OFF VCI analog input

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

64 Chapter 5 Parameter Introductions

The preset close-loop references in Table 5-10 can be Only multi-function input terminals X7 and X8 can be
selected by the different On/Off combinations of used for this function. The terminal is used in
terminals 1~3. fixed-length control and calculating the length via pulses.
33: Start traverse operation See F9.14~F9.19 for details.

When the traverse operation is set to “manual start”, the 45: inputting pulse signal
traverse function can be enabled if this terminal is Only multi-function input terminals X7 and X8 can be
enabled, see Group F6 parameters for details. used as this function. The terminal is used to input pulse
34: Reset the traverse operating status signal as frequency reference. See Group F1
parameters for the relationship between input pulse
If traverse operation is enabled, switching on this
frequency and the reference frequency.
terminal can clear the memorized information about
traverse operation no matter the drive is in auto start or 46: Single-phase speed measuring input
manual start mode. Traverse operation restarts after this Only multi-function input terminals X7 and X8 can be
terminal is disconnected. See group F6 parameters. used as this function. See section 3.3.2. The speed
35: external stopping command control accuracy is ±0.1%. Single-phase speed

This stopping command is active in all control modes. feedback control can be realized by using this terminal
When terminal 35 is enabled, the drive will stop in the and PG.
mode defined in F2.08. 47: Speed measuring input SM1
36: Reserved 48: Speed measuring input SM2
37: disabling the drive’s operation Only multi-function input terminals X7 and X8 can be
If terminal 37 is enabled, the drive that is operating will used as this function. See section 3.3.2. The speed
coast to stop and is prohibited to restart. This function is control accuracy is ±0.1%. Dual-phase speed feedback
mainly used in application with requirements of safety control can be realized by using this terminal and PG.
protection.
Note:
38: Reserved
When the drive is performing motor auto-tuning, No. 44~47
39: Clear the length information functions of X7 are disabled automatically.
When terminal 39 is enabled, the setting (length) of F7.08 FWD/REV operating modes setup Range:0~3【0】
F9.15 will be cleared to zero.
This parameter defines four operating modes controlled
40: Clear the setting of auxiliary reference frequency
by external terminals.
This function is only active for auxiliary reference
0: 2-wire operating mode 1
frequency (F9.01=1, 2 and 3). When terminal 40 is
EV2000
enabled, the auxiliary frequency is cleared to zero and
the reference is determined by main reference K 2 K1 Running command
. P24
frequency. 0 0 Stop
. PLC
41: Reset the stopping status of PLC operation
1 0 Run reverse K1
. FWD
In stopping status of PLC operation, the memorized PLC K2 . REV
0 1 Run forward
operating information (operating stage, operating time, . COM
operating frequency, etc.) will be cleared when this 1 1 Stop

terminal is enabled. See Group F4 parameters.

Fig. 5-42 2-wire operating mode 1
42: clearing the counter to zero
When the setting is 42, this terminal is used to clear the 1: 2-wire operating mode 2
counter to zero in conjunction with terminal 43. EV2000

43: inputting triggering signal to counter K 2 K1 Running command

. P24
When the setting is 43, this terminal is used to input 0 0 Stop
. PLC
pulse signal to the internal counter of the drive. The
1 0 Stop K1
. FWD
highest pulse frequency is 200Hz. The present counting K2 . REV
0 1 Run forward
value can be saved at power off. See F7.33 and F7.34 . COM
for details. 1 1 Run reverse

44: inputting counting value of length Fig. 5-43 2-wire operating mode 2

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

 Chapter 5 Parameter Introductions 65

2: 3-wire operating mode 1 F7.10 Bi-direction open-collector

Range:0~19【0】
. P24 output terminal Y1
SB2 . PLC F7.11 Bi-direction open-collector
Range:0~19【1】
. FWD output terminal Y2
EV2000
SB1 F7.12 Output functions of relay Range:0~19【16】
. Xi
Refer to section 3.3.2 for the output characteristics of Y1
SB3 and Y2 that are bi-direction open-collector output
. REV
. COM terminal and the relay’s output terminal. Table 5-11
shows the functions of the above 3 terminals. One
Fig. 5-44 3-wire operating mode 1 function can be selected repeatedly.

Where: Table 5-11 Functions of output terminals

Setting Function
SB1: Stop button
0 Drive running signal (RUN)
SB2: Run forward button
1 Frequency arriving signal (FAR)
SB3: Run reverse button 2 Frequency detection threshold (FDT1)
Terminal Xi is the multi-function input terminal of X1~X8. 3 Frequency detection threshold (FDT2)
At this time, the function of this terminal should be 4 Overload signal (OL)
defined as No.16 function of “3-wire operation”. 5 Low voltage lock-up signal (LU)
3: 3-wire operation mode 2 6 External stopping command (EXT)
. P24 7 High limit of frequency (FHL)
. PLC 8 Lower limit of frequency (FLL)
SB2
K Running direction . FWD 9 Zero-speed running
EV2000
SB1 10 Completion of simple PLC operation
0 Forward . Xi
K . REV 11 PLC cycle completion indication
1 Reverse . COM 12 preset counting value arriving
13 specified counting value arriving
Fig. 5-45 3-wire operating mode 2
14 preset length arriving indication
Where: 15 drive ready (RDY)
SB1: Stop button 16 Drive fails
SB2: Run button 17 Extended function 1 of host
Terminal Xi is the multi-function input terminal of X1~X8. Upper and lower limits of traverse
18
operating frequency
At this time, the function of this terminal should be
defined as No.16 function of “3-wire operation”. 19 Preset operating time out
In Table 5-11:
Note:
0: Drive running signal (RUN)
In terminal control mode, for 2-wire operating mode 1 and When the drive is in operating status, there will be
2, although the terminal is enabled, the drive will not run running indication signal output by this terminal.
forward or reverse when the drive stops due to the STOP
1: Frequency arriving signal (FAR)
command from terminal function 11 or 35 (see
F7.00~F7.07), PLC stop after single cycle, stop due to the See F7.13.
arrival of fixed length, pressing STOP key. If you need to 2: Frequency detection threshold (FDT1)
start the drive again, enable FWD/REV again. However, See F7.14~F7.15.
when the drive stops due to a fault, it will start immediately 3: Frequency detection threshold (FDT2)
if the terminal FWD/REV is enabled and the fault is See F7.16~F7.17.
cleared.
4: Overload signal (OL)
F7.09 UP/DN rate Range:0.01~99.99Hz/s【1.00Hz/s】
The terminal outputs the indicating signal if the drive’s
F7.09 is used to define the change rate of reference output current is higher than the value defined by FL.05
frequency that is changed by terminal UP/DN. and the overload time is longer than the time defined by

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

66 Chapter 5 Parameter Introductions

FL.06. This function is usually used in overload 18: Upper and lower limits of traverse operating
pre-alarm. See Fig. 5-74. frequency
5: Low voltage lock-up signal (LU) If traverse operating function is selected, an indicating
The terminal outputs the indicating signal if the DC bus signal will be output if the traverse operating frequency
voltage is lower than the low voltage limit, and the LED calculated by central frequency is higher than upper limit
displays “P.oFF”. of frequency (F0.12) or lower than the lower limit of
6: External stopping command (EXT) frequency (F0.13), as shown in Fig. 5-46.

The terminal outputs the indicating signal if the drive Before limiting amplitude
Upper limit o f freq
outputs tripping signal caused by external fault (E015). After limiting amplitude
Traverse operation
7: High limit of frequency (FHL) Central freq.

The terminal outputs the indicating signal if the preset

Lower limit of freq.
frequency is higher than upper limit of frequency and the
operating frequency reaches the upper limit of
frequency.
Y1: upper and lower limit
8: Lower limit of frequency (FLL) of traverse operation

The terminal outputs the indicating signal if the preset

frequency is higher than lower limit of frequency and the Fig. 5-46 Traverse operating amplitude control
operating frequency reaches the lower limit of
19: preset operating time out
frequency.
The terminal outputs the indicating signal if the drive’s
9: Zero-speed running
total operating time (Fn.01) reaches preset operating
The terminal outputs the indicating signal if the drive’s time (Fn.00).
output frequency is 0 and the drive is in operating status. F7.13 Frequency arriving signal Range:0.00~650.00Hz
10: Completion of simple PLC operation stages (FAR) 【2.50Hz】
The terminal outputs the indicating signal (pulse signal, As shown in Fig. 5-47, if the drive’s output frequency is
500ms width) if the present stage of PLC operation is within the detecting range of preset frequency, a pulse
finished. signal will be output.
11: PLC cycle completion indication Output
The terminal outputs the indicating signal (signal pulse,
500ms width) if one cycle of PLC operation is finished.
Preset 1/2
12: preset counting value arriving freq. detecting range
13: reference length arriving indication
Refer to F7.33~F7.34 for terminals 12 and 13. Time

14: preset length arrival indication Y

The terminal outputs the indicating signal if the actual
Time
length defined by F9.15 is longer than the length defined
by F9.14. Function of terminal X1~X8 should be set to Fig. 5-47 Frequency arriving signal
No.44 function. F7.14 FDT1 level Range: 0.00~650.00Hz【50.00Hz】
15: drive ready (RDY) F7.15 FDT1 lag Range: 0.00~650.00Hz【1.00Hz】
If RDY signal is output, it means the drive has no fault, F7.16 FDT2 level Range: 0.00~650.00Hz【25.00Hz】
its DC bus voltage is normal and it can receive starting
F7.17 FDT2 lag Range: 0.00~650.00Hz【1.00Hz】
command.
F7.14~F7.15 is a complement to the No.2 function in
16: Drive fails
Table 5-11. F7.16~F7.17 is a complement to the No.3
The terminal outputs the indicating signal if the drive has
function in Table 5-11. Their functions are the same.
faults.
Take F7.14~F7.15 for example: when the drive’s output
17: extended function 1 of host frequency reaches a certain preset frequency (FDT1
The output signal of terminal Y1, Y2 or TC is directly level), it outputs an indicating signal until its output
controlled by a serial port. Refer to the communicating frequency drops below a certain frequency of FDT1 level
protocol of EV2000. (FDT1 level-FDT1 lag), as shown in Fig. 5-48.

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

 Chapter 5 Parameter Introductions 67

Output Setting Functions Range

frequency
9 CCI 0~10V/0~20mA
FDT1 level FDT1 lag
0~2 times of rated
10 Output power
power
Time
Extended function of
11 0~65535
Y host 2

Time
If the extended function 2 of host 2 is enabled, the
output signal of terminal Y1, Y2 or TC is directly
Fig. 5-48 FDT level controlled by a serial port. “65535” corresponds to the
F7.18~F7.25 Reserved Max output of 10V(or 20mA). Refer to the
communication protocol of EV2000 for details.
For example:
F7.26 Functions of terminal AO1 Range:0~11【0】
AO1 outputs 4~20mA, which indicates bus voltage
F7.27 Functions of terminal AO2 Range:0~11【3】
0~800V.
F7.28 Functions of terminal DO Range:0~11【0】
The settings:
AO1 and AO2 are analog output terminals, and DO is
①F7.26=7, output bus voltage;
pulse output terminals.
②F7.29=01, output of terminal AO1 is 4~20mA;
Refer to section 3.3.2 for the output characteristics of
AO1 and AO2, their analog output ranges are defined by ③F7.30=100%, output gain is 100%;
F7.29. ④AO1 jumper of CN16 short circuited at 0/4-20mA side.
Pulse frequency range of DO: 0~Max output pulse
Note:
frequency (defined by F7.32).
The relationship between the displaying range and the If terminal X8 selects functions of 44~46, DO is disabled
output values of AO1, AO2 and DO are given in Table automatically
5-12. F7.29 Analog output range
Range:00~11【00】
Table 5-12 Displaying range of output terminals selection

Setting Functions Range A B C D

Output frequency AO1 output range
0~Max output
0 before slip 0: 0~10V or 0~20mA
frequency
compensation 1: 2~10V or 4~20mA

Output frequency after 0~Max output AO2 output range

1
slip compensation frequency 0: 0~10V or 0~20mA
1: 2~10V or 4~20mA
0~Max output
2 Preset frequency Reserved
frequency

0~2 times of drive’s Reserved

3 Output current
rated current
Fig. 5-49 analog output offset settings
0~2 times of motor’s
4 Output current Where,
rated current
A: thousand’s place B: Hundred’s place
0~2 times of motor’s C: Ten’s place D: Unit’s place
5 Output torque
rated torque
F7.29 is used to select analog output ranges of AO1 and
0~1.2 times of drive’s AO2.
6 Output voltage
rated voltage Range:0.0~200.0%
F7.30 Output gain of AO1
【100.0%】
7 Bus voltage 0~800V
Range:0.0~200.0%
8 VCI 0~10V F7.31 Output gain of AO2
【100.0%】

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

68 Chapter 5 Parameter Introductions

As to the analog output of AO1 and AO2, you can adjust

A B C D
the output gain to change the measuring range or
calibrate the meter. BIT0 : positive/negative logic of X1
BIT1 : positive/negative logic of X2
Note: BIT2 : positive/negative logic of X3
BIT3 : positive/negative logic of X4
Changing the settings of F7.30 and F7.31 will influence the BIT0 : positive/negative logic of X5
analog output. BIT1 : positive/negative logic of X6
BIT2 : positive/negative logic of X7
F7.32 Maximum output Range:0~50.0kHz
BIT3: positive/negative logic of X8
frequency of DO 【10.0KHz】
BIT0 : positive/negative logic of FWD
F7.32 defines the permissible maximum frequency of BIT1: positive/negative logic of REV
BIT2 : positive/negative logic of Y1
DO, refer to F7.28. BIT3: positive/negative logic of Y2
F7.33 Preset counting value Range: F7.34~9999【0】
BIT0: reserved
F7.34 Specified counting value Range: 0~F7.33【0】 BIT1: reserved
BIT2: reserved
F7.33 and F7.34 are complements for No. 12 and 13 BIT3: reserved
functions in Table-5-11.
Fig. 5-51 terminal’s positive and negative logic
It defines after Xi receives the number of pulse F7.33,
the relay or Yi (bi-direction open-collector output Where,
terminal) will give a signal. A: Thousand’s place B: Hundred’s place
For example: as shown in Fig. 5-50, when the eighth C: Ten’s place D: Unit’s place
pulse signal is received by terminal Xi, Y1 outputs an F7.35 defines the terminal’s positive and negative logic
indicating signal. At this time F7.33=8. Positive logic: Terminal Xi is enabled if it is connected to
When Xi receives the number of pulse F7.34, Yi will give the common terminal;
a signal which will last until F7.33 arrives. Negative logic: Terminal Xi is disabled if it is connected
As shown in Fig. 5-50, when Xi receives the 5th pulse, to the common terminal;
Y2 outputs an indication signal. It lasts until X1 receives If the bit is set at 0, it means positive logic; if set at 1, it
the 8th pulse. In this case, F7.34=5, F7.33=8. F7.34 is means negative logic.
invalid if it is bigger than F7.33.
For example:
Xi 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
input If X1~X8 are required to be positive logic, terminals
FWD and REV are required to be negative logic,
Y1 terminal Y1 is positive logic and terminal Y2 is negative
logic, then the settings:
Y2 Logic status of X4~X1 is 0000, and the hex value is 0;
Logic status of X8~X5 is 0000, and the hex value is 0,;
Fig. 5-50 Preset and specified pulse number
Logic status of Y2, Y1, REV and FWD is 1011, and the
F7.35 Terminal’s positive and Range:000~FFFH hex value is B, so F7.35 should be set at “0B00”. Refer
negative logic 【000H】 to Table 5-13.
Table 5-13 Conversion of binary code and hex value
Binary settings Hex value
Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0 (Displaying of LED)
0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 1 1
0 0 1 0 2
0 0 1 1 3
0 1 0 0 4
0 1 0 1 5
0 1 1 0 6
0 1 1 1 7
1 0 0 0 8
1 0 0 1 9

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

 Chapter 5 Parameter Introductions 69

Binary settings Hex value F8.02 Displayed parameter Range:000~3FFH

Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0 (Displaying of LED) group 2 during operation 【000H】
1 0 1 0 A
A B C D
1 0 1 1 B
BIT0: output volt V
1 1 0 0 C BIT1: DC bus volt V
1 1 0 1 D BIT2: VCI V
BIT3: CCI V
1 1 1 0 E
1 1 1 1 F BIT0: closeloop feedback%
BIT1: closeloop reference%
BIT2: external counting value
Note: BIT3: terminal status

Factory setting of all the terminals is positive logic. BIT0: actual length
BIT1: preset length
BIT2: reserved
5.9 Display (Group F8) BIT3: reserved

BIT0: reserved
BIT1: reserved
F8.00 Language selection Range:0~1【0】 BIT2: reserved
BIT3: reserved
0:Chinese
1:English Fig. 5-53 Operating parameter 2 displayed by LED
F8.00 is effective for the panel with LCD screen. Where,
F8.01 Displayed parameter Range:000~3FFH A: thousand’s place B: Hundred’s place
group 1 during operation 【3FFH】
C: Ten’s place D: Unit’s place
A B C D The terminal information includes status of terminal
X1~X8, bi-direction open-collector output terminals Y1
BIT0: output freq.Hz(before compensation)
BIT1: output freq.Hz (after compensation) and Y2, and relay output terminal TC. The status of
BIT2: preset freq.Hz terminals are indicated by the “On” or “Off’ of LED. If the
BIT3: output current A
LED turns on, that means the terminal is enabled, and
BIT0 : running speed rpm
BIT1: preset speed rpm
the terminal is disabled if the LED turns off, as shown in
BIT2: running line speed m/s Fig.5-54:
BIT3: preset line speed m/s

BIT0: output power

BIT1: output torque %
BIT2: reserved
BIT3: reserved
BIT0: reserved
BIT1: reserved
BIT2: reserved
BIT3: reserved

Fig. 5-52 LED displayed parameter group 1 in operation

Fig. 5-54 Terminal status
Where,
A: thousand’s place B: Hundred’s place In Fig.5-54, the LEDs display that terminals X1, X2, X4,
X5 and X8 are enabled, terminals X3, X6 and X7 are
C: Ten’s place D: Unit’s place
disabled, terminals Y1 and TC are enabled and terminal
F8.01 and F8.02 define the parameters that can be
Y2 is disabled. The central four LEDs always illuminate
displayed by LED in operating status.
for the convenience of observation.
If Bit is 0, the parameter will not be displayed;
If Bit is 1, the parameter will be displayed. Note:

For example, Unit place of LED (Bit0) is to display the When the rotating speed and line speed are displayed, these
“output frequency before compensation”, if Bit0=0, the values can be revised by pressing ▲ and ▼ directly (no
parameter will not be displayed, if Bit0=1, the parameter need to switch to frequency displaying status).
will be displayed. When F8.01 and F8.02 are all set to 0, the frequency before
See F7.35 for the relationship between the values of compensation will be displayed.
each Bit and the displayed value of LED.

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

70 Chapter 5 Parameter Introductions

Press XX key to scroll through the parameters set in F8.02 F8.06 is used to correct error between actual physical
during operation. value (pressure or flow) and reference or feedback
F8.03 Parameters displayed at Range:0000~3FFFH values (voltage or current). It has no influence on
STOP state 【1FFH】 close-loop PI regulation.

A B C D
5.10 Enhanced Functions(Group F9)
BIT0 : preset frequency Hz
BIT1: external counting value
BIT2: running rotating speed rpm F9.00 Control mode bundled Range:000~666
BIT3: preset rotating speed rpm
with frequency selector 【000】
BIT0 : running line speedm/s
BIT1: preset line speed m/s F9.00 can bundle 3 control modes with 6 reference
BIT2 : VCI V
BIT3: CCI V frequency selectors, that is, if a control mode is selected,
BIT0: closeloop reference % then a frequency selector (such as panel input, analog
BIT1: closeloop setting %
BIT2: actual length VCI input) will be selected automatically.
BIT3: preset length
A B C D
BIT0 : terminal status
BIT1: bus voltage
BIT2: reserved Reference selector in panel control mode
BIT3: reserved
0: No bundling
1: Digital setting1 (▲ and ▼ )
Fig. 5-55 Stopping parameters displayed by LED
2: Digital setting 2 ( terminal UP/DN)
Where, 3: Digital setting 3 (serial port )
4: VCI analog input
A: thousand’s place B: Hundred’s place 5: CCI analog input
6: Pulse terminal input
C: Ten’s place D: Unit’s place
F8.03 defines the parameters that can be displayed by Reference selector in terminal control mode
0～6 : same with above
LED in stopping process.
Reference selector in serial port control mode
If Bit is 0, the parameter will not be displayed, and if Bit 0～6 : same with above
is 1, the parameter will be displayed.
Reserved
For example, Bit0 decides whether to display the “preset
frequency”, if Bit0=0, the parameter will not be displayed, Fig. 5-56 Control mode is bundled to frequency selector
if Bit0=1, the parameter will be displayed.
Where,
When setting this parameter, see Table 5-13 for
A: thousand’s place B: Hundred’s place
conversion of binary code and HEX value.
C: Ten’s place D: Unit’s place
Note: The reference frequency selector is defined by F0.00,
When the rotating speed and line speed are displayed, these see section 5.1 for details.
values can be revised by pressing ▲ and ▼ directly (no Different control modes can be bundled to one reference
need to change to frequency displaying status). frequency selector.
When the setting of F8.03 is 0, the preset frequency will be There are 3 methods to select control modes:
displayed. Method 1: change F0.03 “Control modes selector”;
Press XX key to scroll through the parameters set by F8.03 Method 2: use PANEL/REMOTE or ENTER/DATA;
when the drive stops.
Method 3: use the terminals that can select control
F8.04 Rotating Speed Range:0.1~999.9%
modes (Functions of terminals X1~X8 should be set to
display coefficient 【100.0%】
No. 28 and 29 functions.)
F8.04 is used to correct the error of displayed rotating For example:
speed and it has no influence on actual speed.
In order to realize remote and local control, it requires
F8.05 Line speed display Range:0.1~999.9% that:
coefficient 【1.0%】
①Control modes selection: The control modes can be
F8.05 is used to correct the error of displayed line speed selected by terminal remotely or by PANEL/REMOTE
and it has no influence on actual speed. locally;
F8.06 Close-loop parameter Range:0.1~999.9%
display coefficient 【100.0%】

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

 Chapter 5 Parameter Introductions 71

②If panel control mode is used, press RUN to run the Note:
drive and press STOP to stop the drive. The preset The parameter is default 000, that is, the frequency selector
frequency can be adjusted by pressing ▲ and ▼. is not bundled with control mode.
③If terminal control mode is used, connect FWD F9.01 Auxiliary reference
Range: 0~12【0】
terminal to run forward and connect REV terminal to run frequency selector
reverse. The preset frequency is adjusted via VCI. F9.02 Auxiliary analog Range: 0.00~9.99
④Terminal control mode is enabled after the drive is reference frequency coefficient 【1.00】
switched on. F9.03 Initial auxiliary digital Range: 0.00~650.0Hz
Remote Local reference frequency 【0.00Hz】
Multi-function input F9.04 Auxiliary digital
Terminal Xi Range: 000~111【000】
Terminal control Panel control mode reference frequency control
mode
The preset frequency of EV2000 drive is the result out of
the operation on the main reference frequency and
PANEL/REMOTE
Digital setting auxiliary reference frequency. F9.01~F9.04 define the
VCI input ENTER/DATA
mode 1 auxiliary reference frequency selector. Fig. 5-59 shows
the process of operation.
Coefficient
F1 F3 F4 Preset
Power on Main ref. freq. + adjustment
freq.
(F9.05, F9.06)

Common F2
Fig. 5-57 Remote and local control operating freq. Auxiliary
(F0.00=0~5) ref. freq.
Set the parameters below to realize remote and local
Preset freq.
control: (F3.23~F3.29)
No auxiliary
freq.(F9.01=0)
Set F0.03=1 to select terminal control mode and remote PLC operating freq. Digital setting of
control is enabled after the drive is switched on; (F4.00~F4.14) auxiliary
freq.(F9.01=1~3)
Set F7.00=28, F7.01=29, to select multi-function input Close-loop
operating freq. Analog setting of
terminal X1 and X2 to input operating commands; auxiliary ref.
(F5.00~F5.26) freq.(F9.01=4~12)
Set F7.08=1, to select 2-wire control mode 2. The drive
run forward when FWD is enabled, and run reverse Fig. 5-59 Preset frequency
when REV is enabled; Pre-processing

Set F9.07 to 020 to enable PANEL/REMOTE; ▲▼

UPDN
Initial value and sign
If F9.00=041, then terminal control mode is bundled to Digital of aux. ref. Setting F9.04
Serial F9.03 and F9.04
VCI analog reference, and the panel control mode is port
Setting
bundled to digital reference setting 1. Pre-processing of Aux. ref. freq.
VCI F9.01
QF R U
CCI Gain processing
Analog Setting of F1.00
3-phase S V F9.02
M
AC EV2000 W PULSE

supply T
PE
Fig. 5-60 Auxiliary reference frequency selector
. VRF P24 .
Auxiliary reference frequency is controlled by
. VCI PLC .
4.7k F9.01~F9.04. F9.01 defines the auxiliary reference
. GND FWD
. K1
frequency selector.
REV . K2

. PE X1 .
K3

X2 .
K4

COM
.
Fig. 5-58 Wiring of remote and local control

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

72 Chapter 5 Parameter Introductions

Table 5-14 Auxiliary reference frequency selector reference frequency increases with pulse frequency. For
SN Reference selector Features example, as shown in Fig. 5-62:
No auxiliary reference Auxiliary frequency
0 Zero
frequency
0.5 fmax
Digital setting 1, set the
1 Reference is set by
reference by ▲ and ▼
F9.03, the changed
Digital setting 2, set the
2 frequency will be
reference by UP/DN 0 Pmid F1.03 Pulse
saved in F9.03 upon
Digital setting 3, set the
3 power outage.
reference serial port
-0.5 fmax Pmid——1/2 *Max input pulse frequency (F1.03)
4 VCI analog input
fmax——frequency corresponds to Max analog
5 CCI analog input Determined by value (F1.07 or F1.11)
6 PULSE terminal input actual input analog
Fig. 5-62 PULSE-0.5×F1.03 as auxiliary ref. setting
7 - VCI analog input value, see F1.00 for
8 - CCI analog input frequency curves method
9 - PULSE terminal input F9.02: Coefficient of analog auxiliary reference
10 VCI-5 Determined by Only valid when F9.01=4~12. First, use F9.02 to
actual input analog calculate the gain and then calculate the auxiliary
11 CCI-5
value, see F1.00 for reference frequency by the frequency curve defined by
12 PULSE-0.5×F1.03 frequency curves F1.00.
If digital setting 3 is selected, and the frequency F9.03: initial value of digital reference frequency
reference is input via the serial port, then the auxiliary
Only valid when F9.01=1~3. F9.03 defines the initial
frequency can be changed by setting F9.03 through the
values of digital reference frequency when F9.01=1~3.
host.
F9.04: digital auxiliary reference frequency control
When selecting VCI-5 or CCI-5 to input auxiliary
Only valid when F9.01=1~3, as shown in Fig.5-63.
reference frequency, the 5V analog input should be
used as a central point, from 0 to 5V, the reference A B C D
frequency drops with the increase of voltage，while from Save
5 to 10V, the frequency increases with voltage. For 0: Save ref. Freq. upon power outage
1: Not save ref. Freq. upon power
example, as shown in Fig. 5-61: outage

Stopping freq.
0: Hold ref. Freq. at stop
1: Clear ref. Freq. at stop

Sign of auxi. ref. Freq.

0: +, main ref+ auxi. ref. Freq.
1: -, main ref - auxi. ref. Freq.

Reserved

Fig. 5-63 Digital auxiliary reference frequency control

Where,
A: thousand’s place B: Hundred’s place

Fig. 5-61 VCI-5/CCI-5 as auxiliary ref. setting method C: Ten’s place D: Unit’s place
Unit’s place: parameter-saving function at power off
When using PULSE-0.5×F1.03 to determine auxiliary
reference frequency, one half of F1.03 (Max input pulse 0: Save the auxiliary reference frequency at power off
The auxiliary frequency will be stored in F9.03 at power
frequency) is the central point. Within 0~0.5×F1.03 pulse
off. The sign of auxiliary reference frequency is saved in
frequency, the reference frequency decreases with the
F9.04.
increase of pulse frequency; within 0.5×F1.03~F1.03, the
1: not save the auxiliary frequency at power off

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

 Chapter 5 Parameter Introductions 73

Ten’s place: Holding of auxiliary frequency at power-off

A B C D
0: Hold the auxiliary reference frequency after stop
STOP/RESET
1: Clear the preset frequency after stopping
0: Active in panel control mode
Clear the auxiliary reference frequency after the drive 1: Active in all control modes
stops. 2: Active in panel control mode,
drive displays E015 if used in
Hundred’s place: Sign of reference frequency other control modes

0: Plus PANEL/REMOTE
The sum of main reference frequency and auxiliary 0: Inactive
reference frequency is the preset frequency. 1: Active in stopping status
2: Active in running and stopping
1: Minus status
The result of subtracting auxiliary reference frequency Panel lock-up
from the main reference frequency is the preset 0: No lock up
frequency. 1: Lock up
2: Lock all the keys except STOP
Note: 3: Lock up all the keys except XX
4: Lock up except RUN and STOP
When the inputting mode of auxiliary reference frequency,
such as input via panel, terminal or serial port is the same Reserved
with that of main reference frequency, the auxiliary
Fig. 5-64 Functions of keys and panel locking up function
frequency is invalid.
F9.05 Frequency adjustment Range:0~2【0】 Where,
F9.06 Adjustment coefficient of Range:0.0%~200.0% A: thousand’s place B: Hundred’s place
preset frequency 【100.0%】 C: Ten’s place D: Unit’s place
F9.05 and F9.06 define the adjustment of preset Unit’s place: Function of STOP/RESET
frequency as shown in Fig. 5-59.
This Bit defines in which modes the key is valid for
0: Disabled stopping the drive
No adjustment is done to the main frequency, F4=F3 0: Enabled only in panel control mode
1: adjust based on max. output frequency 1: Enabled in panel control mode, terminal and serial
Preset frequency (F4)=F3+F0.05×(F9.06-100%) control modes. The drive stops in the defined manner
2: adjust based on the main reference frequency when this key is pressed.
Preset frequency (F4)=F3+F3×(F9.06-100%) 2: Enabled in panel control mode, terminal and serial
=F3×F9.06. control modes.
F9.07 Function of keys Range: 000~422【000】 In panel control mode, the drive stops in defined manner
F9.07 defines the functions of PANEL/REMOTE and when this key is pressed. But, in terminal and serial
STOP/RESET key, and the locking up function of panel. control modes, the drive will alarms and display fault
code of E015 and coasts to stop.
The STOP/RESET key is valid for all control modes
when resetting a fault.
Ten’s place: Function of PANEL/REMOTE
0: PANEL/REMOTE is disabled.
1: PANEL/REMOTE is enabled only in stopping state,
not operating state.
2: PANEL/REMOTE can be used to select the control
mode both in operating status and stopping status.
Press the key to switch the control mode, and the LED
will indicate the mode accordingly. When panel/control
mode is selected, the LED turns on; when terminal

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

74 Chapter 5 Parameter Introductions

control mode is selected, the LED turns off; when serial

port control mode is selected, the LED flashes. Load

Belt
Note:
Motor
After selecting a control mode by using PANEL/REMOTE,
be sure to press ENTER/DATA key to confirm within 3 Drives 1 2 3 4 5
seconds.
Fig. 5-65 Droop control
Hundred’s place: Locking panel
0: not lock any key on the panel. When the load of one drive is heavier, this drive will
reduce its output frequency to shed part of the load
1: Locking up function is enabled and all keys on the
according to the settings of F9.10. You can increase the
panel are locked up.
setting gradually when testing. The relationship between
2: Except STOP/RESET, other keys are locked up. the load and the output frequency is shown in Fig. 5-66:
3: Except XX, other keys are locked up. Droop control
Torque
4: Except RUN and STOP, all other keys are locked up. No droop control
After setting the parameter, you have to do certain
Rated
operation on the keypad to lock the panel. Please refer
torque
to Figure 4-8.
F9.08 Fan control mode Range:0. 1【0】
0: Auto stopping mode o Speed
Synchronuous speed
The fan runs all the time when the drive is operating.
After the drive stops, its internal temperature detecting
program will be activated to stop the fan or let the fan
continue to run according to the IGBT’s temperature.
1: The fan operates continuously.
The fan operates continuously after the drive is switched Fig. 5-66 Droop control
on.
F9.11 Overshoot enabling Range:0. 1【1】
F9.09 Unit of Acc/Dec time Range: 0. 1【0】
When the AC supply voltage is lower than 85% of rated
F9.09 decides the unit of Acc/Dec time.
load for a long time or the drive has driven a heavy load
0: Second for a long time, the drive can increase its output voltage
1: Minute by increasing the utilization rate of DC bus voltage.
This function is active for all the Acc or Dec process F9.11 decides whether to enable the overshoot function.
except Jogging process. 0: disabled
Up to 60 hours’ Acc/Dec time can be set, suitable for the 1: enabled
application with a requirement of long Acc/Dec time.
Note:
Note
When overshoot function is enabled, output current
It is recommended to select “second” as the unit. harmonics will increase.
F9.10 Droop control Range:0.00~10.00Hz【0.00Hz】 F9.12 Threshold of Range: 0.00~650.00Hz
When several drives drive one load, the function can zero-frequency operation 【0.00Hz】
make the drives share the load equally. An example is F9.13 Hysteresis of Range: 0.00~650.00Hz
shown in Fig. 5-65, 5 drives drive one conveying belt of zero-frequency operation 【0.00Hz】
5 motors. F9.12 and F9.13 are used to set the zero-frequency
operation hysteresis.
Take CCI current reference for example, see Fig.5-67:
Starting process
After the running command is sent out, the motor will
start and accelerate to the frequency corresponding to

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

 Chapter 5 Parameter Introductions 75

the CCI input current until CCI input current reaches or Calculated length＝Number of pulses÷number of
exceeds the preset value of Ib, or the preset frequency pulses per revolution×perimeter of shaft
reaches fb.
The calculated length can be corrected through F9.16
Stopping process: (times of length) and F9.17(correction coefficient of
The drive will not stop immediately when the CCI input length, and the corrected length is the actual length.
current is reduced to Ib. It will stop its output when the Actual length ＝calculated length×F9.16÷correcting
CCI input current drops to Ia and the corresponding
coefficient of length
frequency is fa.
When actual length(F9.15)≥preset length(F9.14), the
“fa” is the zero-frequency operation threshold defined by
drive will send out a STOP command to stop the drive.
F9.12. “fb-fa” is the hysteresis of zero-frequency
When the drive restarts, it needs to clear or modify the
operation defined by F9.13.
actual length (F9.15), otherwise the drive will not start.
This function can enable the drive to enter dormant state
so as to save energy, besides, the drive will not start at Note:
the threshold of zero-frequency operation if the The actual length (terminal Xi is defined as No.39 function)
hysteresis is set properly. can be cleared by multi-function input terminal. The actual
CCI current input length can be calculated only after this terminal is
Imax
disconnected.
Ib Actual length (setting of F9.15) will be saved after power
Ic
Ia off automatically.
Imin Function of stopping at fixed length is disabled if F9.14 is
set to 0, but the calculated length is still effective.
Fmin Fmax primary frequency setting
Actual
An example of stopping the motor at fixed length:
frequency
setting
Spindle

Speed
Speed measuring shaft
sensor
0
fa fc fb Primary frequency setting
fa: Zero frequency threshold
fb: fa+ zero freq. hysteresis
fc: Freq. corresponding to Ic(CCI input)
Motor
Fig. 5-67 Hysteresis of zero-frequency operation Drive

Range:0.000~65.535km
F9.14 Preset length
【0.000km】 Fig. 5-68 Fixed length control application
Range:0.000~65.535km
F9.15 Actual length In Fig. 5-68, a drive drives a motor that rotates a spindle
【0.000km】
via a conveyor belt. Speed measuring device measures
F9.16 Rate of length Range:0.001~30.000【1.000】
the line speed of the spindle and send the speed signal
F9.17 Correction to the drive in the form of pulses. The drive will count the
Range:0.001~1.000【1.000】
coefficient of length pulses and calculate the actual length. If the actual
Range:0.01~100.00cm length is longer than the preset length, the drive will stop
F9.18 Perimeter of shaft
【10.00cm】 the motor automatically. The operator can remove the
F9.19 Number of pulses spindle and close the terminal that is defined as function
Range: 1~9999【1】
per revolution 39 to clear the length, and then restart and produce the
This group of parameters are used for fixed length next spindle.
control. Note:
The drive inputs counting pulses via terminals (X7 or X8,
Functions of stopping the motor at a fixed length are only
defined as function 44), and calculate length according
valid for the drive of 45kW or below.
to the number of pulses per revolution (F9.19) and
F9.20 Trip-free operation Range:0. 1【0】
perimeter of shaft (F9.18).

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

 76 Chapter 5 Parameter Introductions

F9.21 Frequency decrease Range:0.00~99.99Hz/s When using the panel or serial port or 3-wire modes 1 and 2
rate at voltage compensation 【10.00Hz/s】 to start or stop the drive, the command signal is in pulse
mode and there is no operating command when the drive is
Trip-free operating function enables the drive to perform
switched on.
low-voltage compensation when the voltage drops or
If there is a stopping command, the drive will stop first.
instantaneous under-voltage occurs. The drive can
When the function of restart after power failure is enabled,
continue to operate without tripping by reducing its
the drive will start on the fly after power on if it is not
output frequency and feedback energy via motor.
switched off totally (that is, the motor still runs and drive’s
If F9.20 is set to 0, this function is disabled.
LED displays “P.OFF”). It will start in the starting mode
If F9.20 is set to 1, this function is enabled and defined in F2.00 after power on if it is switched off totally
low-voltage compensation is activated. (LED turns off).
If F9.21 (frequency decrease rate at voltage For 2-wire mode 2, there is control command after
compensation) is set too big, the feedback energy of power-on.
motor will be too large and over-voltage protection might
be activated; If F9.21 is set too small, the feedback 5.11 Reserved (Group FA)
energy of motor will be too small to achieve voltage
compensation effect. So, please set F9.21 according to FA.00~FA.11 Reserved
load inertia and the actual load.

Note: 5.12 Communication Parameters (Group FF)

This function is active only for the drive of 22kW or below.
FF.00 Communication Range:0000~1127H
F9.22 Restart after power failure Range:0. 1【0】
configuration 【0005】
F9.23 Delay time for restart after Range:0.0~10.0s
power failure 【0.5s】 A B C D

F9.22 and F9.23 decide whether the drive starts Baud rate
:
automatically and the delay time for restart when the 0: 300bps
1: 600bps
drive is switched off and then switched on in different 2: 1200bps
control modes. 3: 2400bps
4: 4800bps
If F9.22 is set to 0, the drive will not run automatically 5: 9600bps
after restarted. 6: 19200bps
7: 38400bps
If F9.22 is set to 1, when the drive is powered on after
power failure, it will wait certain time defined by F9.23
Data format
and then start automatically depending on the current 0: 1-8-1 format, no parity
control mode and the drive’s status before power failure. 1: 1-8-1 format, even parity
See Table 5-15. 2: 1-8-1format, odd parity

Table 5-15 Restarting conditions Virtual input terminal

Control modes 0: Disabled
Status 1: Enabled
Setting
before Panel Serial 3-wire modes 2-wire modes
of port 1 and 2 1 and 2 Wiring mode:
power
F9.22 0: Cable（RS232/485）
off Without control command With 1: MODEM（RS232 ）
Stop 0 0 0 0 0 Fig. 5-69 Communication parameters
0
Run 0 0 0 0 0
Where,
Stop 0 0 0 0 1
1 A: thousand’s place B: Hundred’s place
Run 1 1 1 0 1
C: Ten’s place D: Unit’s place
Note:
FF.00 is used to set the parameters of serial
Table 5-15 shows the drive’s action under different communication.
conditions. “0” means the drive enter ready status and “1” Virtual terminal is used by the host PC to send
means the drive start operation automatically. commands. Each Bit of the data represents one terminal.
Bit0~12 represent the status of virtual terminal X1~X8,

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

 Chapter 5 Parameter Introductions 77

FWD, REV, YI, Y2 and TC respectively. Please refer to Note:

Table A-8 of Appendix 3. The actual terminal is disabled
The motor’s power should match that of the drive.
if the virtual terminal is enabled. The virtual terminal is
Generally the motor’s power is allowed to be lower than
equivalent to the actual terminal.
that of the drive by 20% or bigger by 10%, otherwise the
The setting of thousand’s Bit does not affect the control performance cannot be ensured.
communication process. If FF.00 is set to MODEM
FH.03 Current without Range:0.1~999.9A【dependent
(RS232) mode, the MODEM will be initialized via the
load I0 on drive’s model】
RS232 port each time when the drive is switched on, so
that the MODEM can answer the call automatically after FH.04 Resistance of Range:0.0~50.00%【dependent
it receives 3 ringing signals. See section 3.3.2 in chapter stator %R1 on drive’s model】
for the wiring of remote control circuit formed by dialed FH.05 Leakage Range:0.0~50.00%【dependent
circuits. inductance %Xl on drive’s model】
FF.01 Local address Range:0~127【1】 FH.06 Resistance of Range:0.0~50.00%【dependent
In serial communication, FF.01 is used to identify the rotor %R2 on drive’s model】
drive’s address. FH.07 Exciting Range:0.0~2000.0%【dependent
Note: “127” is the broadcast address. When the address inductance %Xm on drive’s model】
is set to broadcast address, the drive can receive and
See Fig. 5-70 for the above parameters.
execute the command sent by control PC, but will not
answer the PC. R1 jX 1l R2 jX 2l
FF.02 Time threshold for judging Range:0~1000.0s
communication status 【0.0s】 I1 Rm I2 1-S
U1 R2
If the drive has not detected the communication signal I0 Xm S
from the serial port for certain time, it will judge that
communication failure occurs. The time threshold is
defined by FF.02. Fig. 5-70 Motor’s equivalent circuit
If FF.02 is set to 0, the drive will not detect the
In Fig. 5-70, R1, X1l, R2, X2l, Xm and I0 represent stator’s
communication signal of serial port and this function is
resistance, stator’s leakage inductance, rotor’s
disabled.
resistance, rotor’s leakage inductance, exciting
FF.03 Host PC response
Range:0~1000ms【5ms】 inductance and current without load respectively. The
delay
setting of FH.05 is the sum of stator’s leakage
It refers to the time from drive receiving the host PC inductance and rotor’s inductance.
command to returning response frame to it.
The settings of FH.04 ~FH.07 are all percentage values
calculated by the formula below:
5.13 Motor Parameters (Group FH)

FH.00 Number of R
%R =
polarities of motor
Range: 2~14【4】
(
V / 3⋅I ) × 100%
Range:0.4~999.9kW【dependent
FH.01 Rated power R: Stator’s resistance or rotor’s resistance that is
on drive’s model】
converted to the rotor’s side;
Range:0.1~999.9A 【dependent V: Rated voltage;
FH.02 Rated current
on drive’s model】 I: Motor’s rated current
FH.00, FH.01 and FH.02 are used to set the motor’s Formula used for calculating inducatance (leakage
parameters. inductance or exciting inductance):
In order to ensure the control performance, please set X
%X =
FH.00~FH.02 with reference to the values on the
motor’s nameplate.
(
V / 3⋅I ) × 100%
X: sum of rotor’s leakage inductance and stator’s
leakage inductance (converted to stator’s side)or the
exciting inductance based on base frequency;

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

78 Chapter 5 Parameter Introductions

V: Rated voltage; 3. If FH.09 is set to 2, Acc time (F0.10) and Dec time
I: Motor’s rated current (F0.11) should be set correctly.
If motor’s parameters are available, please set FH.04 4. Remove the load from the motor and check the
~FH.07 to the values calculated according to the above safety;
formula. 5. Set FH.09 to 1 or 2, press ENTER/DATA, and then
If the drive performs auto-tuning of motor’s parameters, press RUN to start auto-tuning;
the results will be written to FH.03~FH.07 automatically. 6. When the operating LED turns off, that means the
After motor power (FH.01) is changed, the drive will auto-tuning is over.
change FH.02~FH.07 accordingly.
Note:
Range: 0.00~20.00Hz
FH.08 Rated slip frequency When setting FH.09 to 2, Acc/Dec time can be increased if
【0.00Hz】
over-current or over-voltage fault occurs in the auto-tuning
Motor’s rated slip frequency can be calculated by the process;
motor’s rated speed (nameplate value): When setting FH.09 to 2, the motor’s load must be removed
Rated slip frequency = motor’s rated frequency (e.g. first before starting rotating auto-tuning;
basic frequency F0.06)×(motor’s synchronous The motor must be in standstill status before starting the
speed-motor’s rated speed)÷motor’s synchronous auto-tuning, otherwise the auto-tuning cannot be executed
speed normally;
Where: motor’s synchronous speed = motor’s rated In some applications, for example, the motor cannot break
frequency×120÷number of motor’s poles (FH.00) away from the load or if you have no special requirement
on motor’s control performance, you can select stationary
After setting the slip frequency, the slip compensation
auto-tuning. You can also give up the auto-tuning. At this
will be enabled by F3.07~F3.09.
time, please input the values on the motor’s nameplate
FH.09 Auto-tuning Range:0~2【0】 correctly (FH.00~FH.02).
The function can enable auto tuning of motor’s If the auto-tuning cannot be applied and the correct motor’s
parameters and write the results in the related parameters are available, the user should input the values
parameters automatically. on the motor’s nameplate correctly (FH.00~FH.02), and
0: Auto-tuning is disabled then input the calculated values (FH.03~FH.07). Be sure to
1: Stationary auto-tuning (Start auto-tuning to a standstill set the parameters correctly.
motor) If auto-tuning is not successful, the drive will alarm and
display fault code E024.
Values on the motor’s nameplate must be input correctly
before starting auto-tuning. FH.10 Motor’s stabilization Range:0~255【dependent
factor on drive’s model】
When starting auto-tuning to a standstill motor, the
stator’s resistance (%R1), rotor’s resistance (%R2) and FH.10 is used to suppress the oscillation caused by the
the leakage inductance (%X1) will be detected and drive and the motor. If the drive’s output current changes
written into FH.04, FH.05 and FH.06 automatically. frequently at constant load, you can reduce the
2: Rotating auto-tuning oscillation by adjusting the parameter.
When starting a rotating auto-tuning, the motor is in For the drive of 55kW or below, FH.10 is set at 10, and
standstill status at first, and the stator’s resistance “20” for the drive of 55kW or above.
(%R1), rotor’s resistance (%R2) and the leakage FH.11~FH.21 Reserved
inductance (%X1) will be detected, and then the motor Reserved
will start rotating, exciting inductance (%Xm and I0 will
be detected. All the above parameters will be saved in 5.14 Protective Function (Group FL)
FH.04, FH.05, FH.06, FH.07 and FH.03 automatically.
After auto-tuning, FH.09 will be set to 0 automatically. FL.00 Motor overload
Range:0. 1. 2【1】
Auto-tuning procedures: protection mode selection
1. Set the “F0.06 basic operating frequency” and “F0.07 0: Disabled
Max output voltage” correctly according to the motor’s
The overload protection is disabled. Be careful to use
feature;
this function because the drive will not protect the motor
2. Set the FH.00, FH.01 and FH.02 correctly; when overload occurs;

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

 Chapter 5 Parameter Introductions 79

1:Common mode (with low speed compensation) drive's DC bus. If no measures taken, the drive will trip
Since the cooling effects of common motor deteriorates due to over voltage.
at low speed (below 30Hz), the motor’s overheat During the deceleration, the drive detects the bus
protecting threshold should be lowered, which is called voltage and compares it with the over voltage point at
low speed compensation. stall defined by FL.03. If the bus voltage exceeds the
2: Variable frequency motor (without low speed stall overvoltage point, the drive will stop reducing its
compensation) output frequency. When the bus voltage become lower
The cooling effects of variable frequency motor is not than the point, the deceleration continues, as shown in
affected by the motor’s speed, so low speed Fig. 5-72.
compensation is not necessary.
Overvolt
FL.01 Motor’s overload Range:20.0~110.0% point at
protection coefficient 【100.0%】 stall

In order to apply effective overload protection to different

kinds of motors, the Max output current of the drive Time
should be adjusted as shown in Fig. 5-71.
Time 80% 100%
Output
freq.

Motor overload
protective
coefficient Time

1min Fig. 5-72 Over-voltage at stall

Note:
The drive will alarm and display E015 when it is in the
status of over-voltage at stall for more than 1 minute.
160% 200% Current If the stall point is set too low, you can prolong the Acc and
Dec time properly.
Fig. 5-71 Motor’s overload protection coefficient
FL.04 Overload detection Range:000~111【000】
Use the following coefficient to calculate the coefficient: Range:20~150%
FL.05 Overload pre-alarm
Motor overload motor rated current detection threshold 【130.0%】
= ×100%
protection coefficient inverter's rated output current
FL.06 Overload detection time Range:0.0~60.0s【5.0s】

Generally, the Max load current is the motor’s rated EV2000 has protection over drive and motor overload.
current. See Table 2-1 for drive overload protection, and FL.00
and FL.01 for motor overload protection. FL.04~FL.06
Note: can monitor the overload condition before overload
If the motor’s rated current does not match that of the drive, protection happens.
motor’s overload protection can be realized by setting A B C D
FL.00~FL.01.
Overload alarm detection
FL.02 Protection of 0: Detect all the time
Range:0. 1【1】
Over-voltage at stall 1: Detect in constant speed status
FL.03 Over-voltage point at Range:120~150%
Overload protection
stall 【140.0%】 0: No alarm and continue operation
1: Alarm and stop operation
0: Disabled
1: Enabled Overload detection threshold
0: % of motor's rated current
During deceleration, the motor’s decelerate rate may be 1: % of drive's rated current
lower than that of drive’s output frequency due to the
Reserved
load inertia. At this time, the motor will feed the energy
back to the drive, resulting in the voltage rise on the Fig. 5-73 Settings of FL.04

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

80 Chapter 5 Parameter Introductions

Where, Auto current limiting function is used to limit the load

A: thousand’s place B: Hundred’s place current smaller than the value defined by FL.07 in real
C: Ten’s place D: Unit’s place time. Therefore the drive will not trip due to surge
over-current. This function is especially useful for the
Unit’s place: overload pre-alarm
applications with big load inertia or big change of load.
0: overload pre-alarm function is active all the time when
FL.07 defines the threshold of auto current limiting. It is
the drive is operating
a percentage of the drive’s rated current. It is default
1: overload pre-alarm function is active all the time when
150% for G type and 110% for P type.
the motor is operating at constant speed
FL.08 defines the decrease rate of output frequency
Ten’s place: Actions selection for overload pre-alarm
when the drive is in auto current limiting status.
0:The drive does not alarm and continue to run when
If FL.08 is set too small, overload fault may occur. If it is
detecting active overload signal
set too big, the frequency will change too sharply and
1: The drive alarms and stops when detecting active therefore, the drive may be in generating status for long
overload signal time, which may result in overvoltage protection.
Hundred’s place: overload threshold selection Auto current limiting function is always active in Acc or
0: ratio of load current to motor’s rated current (display Dec process. Whether the function is active in constant
fault code of E014) speed operating process is decided by FL.09.
1: ratio of load current to drive’s rated current (display FL.09＝0, Auto current limiting function is disabled in
fault code E013) constant speed operating process;
FL.05 defines the current threshold for overload FL.09＝1, Auto current limiting function is enabled in
pre-alarm protection. The setting range is a percentage constant speed operating process;
value of rated current, please refer to FL.04.
In auto current limiting process, the drive’s output
FL.06 defines the time during which the drive current frequency may change; therefore, it is recommended not
exceeds FL.05. If the status remains after this period of to enable the function when the drive’s output frequency
time, the drive will output pre-alarm signal. is required stable.
Output current
When the auto current limiting function is enabled, if
Detect threshold FL.07 is set too low, the output overload capacity will be
impaired.
FL.10 Auto reset times Range:0~10【0】
Detect time Detect time Time
FL.11 Reset interval Range:2.0~20.0s【5.0s】
Action
Auto reset function can reset the fault in preset times
Enabled and interval. When FL.10 is set to 0, it means “auto
Time reset” is disabled and the protective device will be
activated in case of fault.
Fig. 5-74 Overload pre-alarm function
Note:
Note: The IGBT protection (E010) and external equipment fault
1. Overload pre-alarm detection threshold should be lower (E015) cannot be reset automatically.
than the overload protection threshold; During the reset interval, the drive stops output and
2. During the overload detection time, if the drive’s current operates at zero frequency. It will restart on the fly after
is smaller than FL.05, the drive will time again for FL.06 reset.
and will not alarm. Be careful in using auto-reset function, otherwise human
Range:20.0~200.0% injury or material loss may occur.
FL.07 Auto current limiting
【depending on drive FL.12 Protective action 1 Range: 000~111【000】
threshold
type】 FL.13 Protective action 2 Range: 0000~3211【0000】
FL.08 Frequency decrease Range:0.00~99.99Hz/s Under some abnormal conditions, the drive can be set to
rate when current limiting 【10.00Hz/s】 ignore them and continue to operate without alarm or
FL.09 Auto current limiting taking protective action through FL.12 and FL.13.
Range:0~1【1】
selection

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

 Chapter 5 Parameter Introductions 81

FL.12 defines the protective actions when Range:0.00~650.00Hz

FL.19 Frequency at last fault
communication fault, contactor fault or EEPROM fault 【0.00Hz】
occurs.
EV2000 has 24 types of protective alarms and it can
A B C D
memorize the types of 3 latest faults (FL.14~FL.16), and
Action for communication fault
0: Alarm and coast to stop the voltage, current and frequency (FL.17~FL.19) of
1: No alarm, continue operation
latest fault.
2: No alarm, stop in stopping
mode (only in serial port control mode) See chapter 7 for the detailed descriptions of alarms.
3: No alarm, stop in stopping mode
( all control modes)

Action for contactor fault

5.15 Drive Parameters (Group Fn)
0: Alarm and coast to stop
1: No alarm, continue operation
Fn.00 Preset operating Range:0~65.535k hours【0】
Action for EEPROM fault
0: Alarm and coast to stop
time
1: No alarm, continue operation
Fn.01 Total operating time Range:0~65.535k hours【0】
Reserved Fn.02 Temperature of
Range: 0~100℃【0】
Fig. 5-75 Protective action 1 heatsink 1
Fn.03 Temperature of
Where, Range: 0~100℃【0】
heatsink 2
A: thousand’s place B: Hundred’s place When the total operating time reaches the preset
C: Ten’s place D: Unit’s place operating time (Fn.00), the drive can output an indicating
FL.13 defines the protective actions when the drive is in signal. See F7.10~F7.12 for details.
under-voltage status, auto reset interval and fault Fn.01 records the actual operating time from first use of
lock-up status. the drive to the present.
A B C D Temperature of heatsink 1 is the temperature of IGBT
Indication for under
- volt fault modules. Different IGBT modules have different
0: No indication
1: Indicate the fault over-temperature threshold.
Indication for auto reset fault Temperature of heatsink 2 is the temperature of rectifier.
0: No indication
1: Indicate the fault The drive of 45kW or below does not detect this
temperature.
Fault lock -up
0: Disable Temperature display range: 0~100℃; accuracy: 5%
1: Enable (no fault indication)
2: Enable (indicate the fault)

Phase- failure protection

0: Input&output phase failure protect
5.16 Protection of Parameters (FP)
1: No input phase failure protect
2: Nooutput phase failure protect
3: No input&output phase failure FP.00 User’s password Range: 0000~9999【0000】
protect
User’s password can prevent unauthorized persons from
Fig. 5-76 Protective action 2 checking and modifying the functional parameters.
Where, Set FP.00 to 0000 if the user’s password is
A: Thousand’s place B: Hundred’s place unnecessary.
C: Ten’s place D: Unit’s place If the user’s password is necessary, input a 4-digit
none-zero figure, press ENTER/DATA to confirm. If not
! Attention pressing any key within 5 minutes, the password will
Please set FL.12 and FL.13 carefully,
otherwise human injury or equipment damage may become effective.
occur. Changing the password:
FL.14 Type of third latest fault Range:0~24【0】 Press MENU/ESC, input the primary password, select
FL.15 Type of second latest fault Range:0~24【0】 FP.00 (at this time FP.00＝0000), input new password
FL.16 Type of latest fault Range:0~24【0】 and press ENTER/DATA to confirm. The password will
FL.17 DC Bus Voltage at last become effective if not pressing any key within 5
Range:0~999V【0V】 minutes.
fault
FL.18 Output current at last fault Range:0~999.9A【0.0A】 Note:

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

82 Chapter 5 Parameter Introductions

Please memorize the password. Note:

FP.01 Parameter write-in protection Range:0~2【1】 For the drive of 45kWG or below, when FP.02 is set to 2,
FP.01 is used to protect the parameter settings: the motor parameters will be set matched with the drive’s
0: All parameters are allowed modifying; type G or P (defined in F0.08).
1: only F0.02 and FP.01 can be modified; FP.03 Parameter copy Range:0~3【0】
2: only FP.01 can be modified. FP.03 is only valid for LCD panel.
0: No action
Note:
1: parameters upload
The factory setting of FP.01 is 1. If you want to modify
2: parameters download
parameters, FP.01 must be set to 0. After the modification,
set the parameter back to 1 or 2. When this parameter is set 3: parameters download (except the parameters related
to 0 and then all the parameters are restored to factory to drive type)
settings, it will still be 0. Note:
1. For LCD panel, you must upload parameters to the
FP.02 Parameter initialization Range:0~2【0】
panel’s memory first, otherwise, there will be no data in the
0: No operation memory. Once the data are uploaded, they will exist
1: Clear memory permanently.
When FP.02 is set to 1, the fault records of FL.14~FL.19 2. Before downloading the parameters to the drive, the
will be cleared. drive will check the version and integrity of the parameters
2: Restore to factory settings stored in the panel. The operation cannot proceed if no data
in the memory, incompleteness of the parameters, or the
If FP.02 is set to 2, the parameters before FL.12 (except
parameter set is incompliant with the version of the drive
F0.08 and FH.00) are restored to factory settings.
(e.g. number of parameters).
FP.02 will be changed to 0 automatically after clearing
3. After the download, the parameters in the panel are still
the memory or restoring to factory settings.
available for copying to other drives.
FP.04 Reserved

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting 83

Chapter 6 Troubleshooting
Table 6-1 listed the possible faults of EV2000. Once a fault occurs, you may check it against the table and record
detailed phenomena before seeking service from your supplier.
Table 6-1 Faults and actions
Fault
Fault categories Possible reasons of fault Actions
code
Too short Acc time Prolong the Acc time
Check and adjust V/F curve, adjust
torque boost or set the motor parameters
Over-current V/F curve is not suitable.
correctly to ensure the normal auto
E001 during torque boost.
acceleration
The rotating motor restarts right after stop. Set F2.00 to “start on fly” function
Low AC supply voltage Check the drive’s input AC supply
Drive power is too small Select a high power drive
Too short Dec time Prolong the Dec time
Over-current
The load generates energy or the load inertial
E002 during Connect suitable braking kit
is too big
deceleration
Too low drive’s power Select the drive with bigger power
Sudden change of load Reduce the change of the load
Over-current in Too short Acc/Dec time Prolong Acc/Dec time
E003 constant speed Abnormal load Check the load
operation Low AC supply voltage Check the AC supply voltage
Insufficient drive’s power Select the drive with bigger power
Abnormal AC supply voltage Check the AC supply voltage
Over voltage
Too short Acc/Dec time Prolong the Acc time
E004 during
acceleration The rotating motor re-start after the drive stops
Set F2.00 to “start on fly” function
instantly.
Too short Dec time (with reference to
Over voltage Prolong the Dec time
generated energy)
E005 during
The load generates energy or the load inertial
deceleration Use suitable dynamic braking kit
is too big
Over voltage in Abnormal AC supply voltage Check the AC supply voltage
constant-speed Too short Acc/Dec time Prolong the Acc/Dec time
E006
operating Abnormal change of input voltage Install input reactor
process Too big load inertia Use suitable dynamic braking kit
Drive’s control
Check the AC supply voltage or seek
E007 power supply Abnormal AC supply voltage
service
over voltage
Check the wiring and installation
E008 Input phase loss Any of phase R, S and T cannot be detected
Check the AC supply voltage
Output phase Check the drive’s output wiring
E009 Any of Phase U, V and W cannot be detected
failure Check the cable and the motor

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

84 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting

Fault
Fault categories Possible reasons of fault Actions
code
Instantaneous over-current Refer to E001~E003
Short-circuit among 3-phase output or
Rewiring
line-to-ground short circuit
Vent is obstructed or fan does not work Clean the vent or replace the fan
Over-temperature Lower the ambient temperature
Protections of Wires or connectors of control board are loose Check and rewiring
E010
IGBT act Current waveform distorted due to output
Check the wiring
phase loss
Auxiliary power supply is damaged or IGBT
Seek service
driving voltage is too low
Short-circuit of IGBT bridge Seek service
Control board is abnormal Seek service
Over-temperature Lower the ambient temperature
IGBT module’s
Vent obstructed Clean the vent
E011 heatsink
Fan does not work Replace the fan
overheat
IGBT module is abnormal Seek service
Rectifier’s Ambient over-temperature Lower the ambient temperature
E012 heatsink Obstruction of ventilation channel Clear the ventilation channel
overheat Fan does not work Replace the fan
Too short Acc/Dec time Prolong the Acc/Dec time
Reduce the DC injection braking current
DC injection braking current is too big
or prolong the braking time
Improper V/F curve Adjust V/F curve or torque boost value
E013 Drive overload
The rotating motor restart after the drive stops Set the starting mode (F2.00) to “start of
instantly. fly”
Low AC supply voltage Check the AC supply voltage
Too heavy load Select the drive with bigger power
Set V/F curve and torque boost value
Improper V/F curve
correctly
Low AC supply voltage Check the AC supply voltage
Common motor has operated with heavy load Use a special motor if the motor is
E014 Motor over-load
at low speed for a long time. required to operate for a long time.
Improper motor’s overload protection threshold Modify the motor’s overload protection
threshold.
Load changes fast Check the load
Check the definition of STOP function in
STOP is pressed in non-panel control mode
F9.07 and the operating mode
Check the definition of STOP function in
Emergent stop STOP pressed when the drive is in stall status
F9.07
E015 or external
The drive will report E015 fault if it is in stall
equipment fails Set FL.02 and FL.03 properly
status for 1 minute
Terminal used for stopping the drive in Disconnect the terminal if the external
emergent status is closed fault is cleared
EEPROM R/W Press STOP/RESET to reset
E016 R/W fault of control parameters Seek service
fault

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting 85

Fault
Fault categories Possible reasons of fault Actions
code
Wrong baud rate setting Set the baud rate correctly
RS232/RS485 Press STOP/RESET to reset, seek
Serial port communication error
E017 communication service
failure Improper settings of alarm parameters Modify FF.02, FF.03 and FL.12
Host PC does not work Check the host PC; Check the wiring
Low AC supply voltage Check the AC supply voltage
Replace the contactor in main circuit and
Contactor damaged
seek service
Contactor not
E018 Replace the soft start resistor and seek
closed Soft start resistor is damaged
service
Control circuit is damaged Seek service
Input phase loss Check the wiring of R, S, T.
Wires or connectors of control board are loose Check and re-wire
Current
Auxiliary power supply is damaged Seek service
E019 detection circuit
Hall sensor is damaged Seek service
has fault
Amplifying circuit is abnormal Seek service
Press STOP/RESET to reset or install
Severe disturbance
System power filter at the input side of the drive.
E020
disturbance Press STOP/RESET to reset
R/W fault of DSP in main control board
Seek service
E021 Reserved Reserved Reserved
E022 Reserved Reserved Reserved
Update the panel’s parameters and
Panel’s parameters are not complete or the version again. First set FP.03 to 1 to
Parameter copy version of the parameters are not the same upload the parameters and then set
E023
error with that of main control board FP.03 to 2 or 3 to download the
parameters.
Panel’s EEPROM is damaged Seek service
Improper settings of parameters on the Set the parameters correctly according to
E024 Auto-tuning fails nameplate the nameplate
Overtime of auto-tuning Check the motor’s wiring

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

86 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting

Table 6-2 Abnormal phenomena and handling methods

Phenomena Conditions Possible reasons of fault Actions
In stopping status, first press
ENTER/DATA and hold on, then press
▼ 3 times continuously to unlock the
Panel is locked up
No response Part of the keys or panel
of operation all the keys are Power-on the drive after it shuts down
panel disabled completely
Panel’s cables are not well connected. Check the wiring

Panel’s keys are damaged Replace operation panel or seek service

Operating status Parameter not allowed changing during
Change the parameter at STOP state
cannot be changed operation
FP.01 is set to 1 or 2 Set FP.01 to 0
Part of parameters
cannot be Do not try to modify these kind of
Parameter is actually detected, not
changed. parameters, they are marked with “*” in
Settings of allowed changing
the parameter table in chapter 8.
parameters MENU/ESC is
cannot be Panel is locked up See “No response of operation panel”
disabled
changed
Parameter not
displayed when Input correct user’s password
pressing
User’s password is required
MENU/ESC.
Instead, “0.0.0.0.” Seek service
is displayed
Fault alarm occurs Find the fault reason and reset the drive
Single cycle of PLC operation is
Check the parameter settings of PLC
completed
The drive stops Function of stopping at fixed length is Clear the information of actual length or
and its “RUN” LED enabled set F9.14 (setting length) to 0
is off, while there is Communication between host or remote Check the communication circuits and
no “STOP” mounted keypad and the drive fails the settings of FF.02, FF.03 and FL.12
command AC supply is interrupted Check the AC supply condition
Check the setting of relevant
The drive Control mode is changed
parameters
stops during
operating Logic of control terminal changes Check the settings of F7.35
process
Auto-reset upon a fault Check the setting of auto-reset
Motor stops when
Check the terminal used for inputting
there is no PLC operation stops
signal of stopping PLC operation
stopping
Stopping command is input from Check the setting of this external
command, while
external terminal terminal
the drive’s “RUN”
LED illuminates Stops at zero-frequency Check the settings of F9.12 and F9.13
and operates at
Preset frequency is 0 Check the frequency setting
zero frequency
Skip frequency is set incorrectly Check the setting of skip frequency

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting 87

Phenomena Conditions Possible reasons of fault Actions

Positive logic: close loop feedback
Motor stops without value >reference Check the close-loop reference and
stopping Negative logic: close loop feedback feedback
The drive value <reference
command, while
stops during
the drive’s “RUN” F9.05 is set to 0 Check the settings of F9.05 and F9.06
operating
LED illuminates Low-voltage compensation is applied
process.
and operates at when the drive restarts after power Check the settings of restart after power
zero frequency failure, besides, the AC supply voltage is failure and the AC supply voltage
too low
Terminal used for coasting to stop is Check the terminal used for coasting to
enabled stop
The terminal used to prohibit the running
Check the terminal
of the drive is enabled.
Terminal used for stopping the drive is Check the terminal used for stopping the
enabled drive
The drive does not Check the function of stopping at fixed
The drive stops at fixed length
work and its “RUN” length and the actual length
The drive In 3-wire control mode, the terminal
LED is off when the
does not work used to control the 3-wire operation is Set and close the terminal
“RUN” key is
pressed. not closed.
Fault alarm occurs Clear the fault
Disable the function of this terminal or
Virtual terminal of host is set incorrectly set it properly via the host or change the
settings of F7.35
Positive and negative logic of input
Check the settings of F7.35
terminal are not set correctly
“POWEROFF”
is reported Since the transistor or contactor is
Transistor or
when the drive disconnected, the bus voltage drops at
contactor Run the drive until the transistor or
begin to run heavier load, therefore, the drive
disconnected and contactor is connected.
immediately displays POWEROFF, not E018
overload
after message.
power-on.

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

88 Chapter 7 Maintenance

Chapter 7 Maintenance
Many factors such as ambient temperature, humidity, dust, vibration, internal component aging, wear and tear will give
rise to the occurrence of potential faults. Therefore, it is necessary to conduct routine maintenance to the drives.

Notes:
As safety precautions, before carrying out check and maintenance of the drive, please ensure that :
The drive has been switched off;
The charging LED lamp inside the drive is off.
Use a volt-meter to test the voltage between terminals (+) and (-) and the voltage should be below 36V.

7.1 Daily Maintenance

The drive must be operated in the environment specified in the Section 2.1. Besides, some unexpected accidents may
occur during operation. You should maintain the drive conditions according to the table below, record the operation data,
and find out problem in the early stage.
Table 7-1 Daily checking items
Instructions
Items Criterion
Items Cycle Checking methods
Temperature and Thermometer and -10℃~+40℃,
Operating humidity hygrometer derating at 40℃~50℃
Any time
environment Dust and water dripping Visual inspection No water dripping
Gas Visual inspection No strange smell
Stable vibration and proper
Vibration and heating Touch the case
Drive Any time temperature
Noise Listen No abnormal sound
Heating Touch by hand No overheat
Motor Any time
Noise Listen Low and regular noise
Output current Current meter Within rated range
Operating status Output voltage Volt-meter Within rated range
Any time
parameters Temperature rise is smaller
Internal temperature Thermometer
than 35℃
3. Check whether the power cables and control cables
7.2 Periodical Maintenance are damaged, check especially for any wear on the
cable tube;
Customer should check the drive every 3 months or 6 4. Check whether the insulating tapes around the cable
months according to the actual environment. lugs are stripped;

Notes: 5. Clean the dust on PCBs and air ducts with a vacuum
cleaner;
1. Only trained personnel can dismantle the drive to replace
6. For drives that have been stored for a long time, it
or repair components;
must be powered on every 2 years. When supplying AC
2. Don't leave metal parts like screws or pads inside the
power to the drive, use a voltage regulator to raise the
drive; otherwise the equipment may be damaged.
input voltage to rated input voltage gradually. The drive
General Inspection: should be powered for 5 hours without load.
1. Check whether the screws of control terminals are 7. Before performing insulation tests, all main circuit
loose. If so, tighten them with a screwdriver; input/output terminals should be short-circuited with
2. Check whether the main circuit terminals are properly conductors. Then proceed insulation test to the ground.
connected; whether the mains cables are over heated; Insulation test of single main circuit terminal to ground is

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

 Chapter 7 Maintenance 89

forbidden; otherwise the drive might be damaged. After the drive is switched off, check if abnormal
Please use a 500V Mega-Ohm-Meter. conditions such as crack exists on fan vanes and other
EV2000 parts. When the drive is switched on, check if drive
P1 (+) (-)
running is normal, and check if there is any abnormal
R U
S V vibration.
W
T
PE . 2. Electrolytic capacitors
. VRF Possible cause of damages: high ambient temperature,
FWD
.
. VCI aging of electrolyte and large pulse current induced by
. GND . rapid changing loads.
COM
.
.TA X7
. Criteria: Check if frequent over-current or over-voltage
P24
. TB .
. TC X8 failures occur during drive start-up with load. Check if
X6
.
there is any leakage of liquids. Check if the safety valve
protrudes. Measure static capacitance and insulation
Fig. 7-1 Insulation test of drive
resistance.
8. Before the insulation test of the motor, disconnect the
motor from the drive to avoid damaging it. 7.4 Storage
EV2000

R P1 (+) (-) U
The following points must be followed for the temporary
S V
W
M
and long-term storage of drive:
T PE
1. Store in locations free of high temperature, humidity,
. VRF .
dust, metal powder, and with good ventilation.
FWD
. VCI 2. Long-term storage will cause the deterioration of
. GND COM .
X7 .
electrolytic capacitors. Therefore, the drive must be
. TA P24 .
. TB switched on for a test within 2 years at least for 5 hours.
X8 .
. TC X6 . The input voltage must be boosted gradually by the
voltage regulator to the rated value.
Fig. 7-2 Insulation test of motor
7.5 Warranty
Notes:
Dielectric strength test of the drive has already been Emerson Network Power will offer warranty service in
conducted in the factory. Do not do the test again, the case of the following situations:
otherwise, the internal components might be damaged. 1.The warranty clause is only confined to the drive;
2. Emerson Network Power will take the responsibility of
7.3 Replacing Wearing Parts 18 months defects liability period for any faults or
damages under the normal operation conditions. After
The components that are easily damaged are: cooling 18 months, maintenance will be charged;
fan and electrolytic capacitors of filters. Their lifetime 3. Even within 18 months, maintenance would be
depends largely on their application environment and charged under the following conditions:
preservation. Normally, lifetime is:
4.Damages incurred to the drive due to incorrect
Components Life operation, which are not in compliance with “User
Fan 3~40,000 hours Manual”;
Electrolyte capacitor 4~50,000 hours ② Damages incurred to the drive due to fire, flood,
You can decide the time when the components should abnormal voltage and so on;
be replaced according to their service time. ③ Damages incurred to the drive due to the improper
Cooling fan use of drive functions;
Possible cause of damages: wear of the bearing, aging 5. Service fee will be charged according to the actual
of the fan vanes. costs. If there are any maintenance contracts, the
Criteria: contract prevail.

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

90 Appendix 1 Parameters

Appendix 1 Parameters
EV2000 series drive’s parameters are organized in The user’s password can be disabled by setting FP.00
groups. Each group has several parameters that are to 0.
identified by “Group No.+ Function Code.. For example, The above rules should be observed when changing the
“F5.08” belongs to group 5 and its function code is 8. password or setting the parameters via the serial port.
For the convenience of setting, parameter group number
corresponds to the first level menu, parameter ! Attention
sub-group corresponds to the second level menu and
parameter value corresponds to the third level menu. It is defaulted that no parameters except F0.02 are
The parameter descriptions are listed in the tables allowed changing. If you need change them, please
below. first set FP.01(parameter write-in protection) from 1
Note: to 0.

1. The “modification” column in the parameter table

means whether the parameter can be modified.
“O” denotes the parameters can be modified during
operation or at STOP state;
“×” denotes the parameters cannot be modified during
operating;
“*” denotes the parameters are actually detected and
cannot be revised;
“-” denotes the parameters are defaulted by factory and
cannot be modified ;
When you try to modify some parameters, the system
will check their modification property automatically to
avoid mis-modification.
Parameter settings are expressed in decimal (DEC) and
hexadecimal (HEX). If the parameter is expressed in
hexadecimal, the bits are independent to each other.
The value of the bits can be 0~F.
In the tables, “LCD display” is available only for the drive
with LCD keypad;
“Factory settings” means the default value of the
parameter. When the parameters are initialized, they will
resume to the factory settings. But the actual detected or
recorded parameters cannot be initialized;
The parameters can be protected against unauthorized
modifications by password. After the user’s password is
set up (FP.00 is not set to zero), you are required to
input password when you press MENU/ESC to enter
menu. For the parameters exclusive for factory use, you
cannot change them.
After the password is set, if no keypad operation within 5
minutes, the modification of parameters will be protected
by password. You can modify the password at any time.
The last input password is valid.

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

 Appendix 1 Parameters 91

Table A-1 Parameters

Group F0: Basic Operating Parameters
Para. Name LCD Display Setting range Unit Factory setting Modif.
0:Digital input 1:set the reference via ▲ and ▼ keys
on panel
1:Digital input 2:set the reference via terminal UP/DN
Reference frequency FREQ SET
F0.00 2:Digital input 3:set the reference via serial port 1 0 ○
selector MODE
3:Set the reference via VCI
4:Set the reference via CCI
5:Set the reference via PULSE terminal
Unit’s place of LED:
0:Frequency value can be saved at power off
1:Frequency value can not be saved at power off
Digital frequency DIGITAL FREQ
F0.01 Ten’s place of LED: 1 00 ○
control CTR
0:Stopping frequency holding
1:Stopping frequency recovery F0.02
Note :Only for F0.00=0,1,2
Set operating
F0.13~F0.12
F0.02 frequency in digital RUN FREQ SET 0.01Hz 50.00Hz ○
(Only for F0.00=0. 1. 2)
mode
RUN 0:Input via panel:(LED turns on);
Methods of inputting
F0.03 COMMAND 1:Input via terminal:(LED off); 1 0 ○
operating commands
SELE 2:Inpuy via serial port:(LED flashes)
RUN
F0.04 Running direction setup 0:Run forward 1:Run reverse 1 0 ○
DIRECTION
Maximum output MAX OUTPUT
F0.05 Max{50.00,upper limit of frequency F0.12}~650.0Hz 0.01Hz 50.00Hz ×
frequency FREQ
Basic operation BASE RUN
F0.06 1.00~650.0Hz 0.01Hz 50.00Hz ×
frequency FREQ
MAX OUTPUT Drive’s rated
F0.07 Max output voltage 1~480V 1V ×
VOLT value
0:Type G(suitable for load with constant torque)
1:Type P(suitable for load of pumps and fans)
F0.08 Type selection MODEL SELE 1 0 ×
Note:Valid for the drive of 45kW or below or the type
G/P integrated drive
TORQ 0.0:(auto)
F0.09 Torque boost 0.1% 0.0% ○
BOOST 0.1%~30.0%
0.1~3600 5.5kW~ 22kWG:
F0.10 Acc time 1 ACC TIME1
Note: 6.0s
0.1 ○
Default unit is second; Unit of Acc/Dec time is defined 30kW~ 280kWP:
F0.11 Dec time 1 DEC TIME1
by F9.09 20.0s
UPPER FREQ Lower limit of frequency F0.13~Maximum frequency
F0.12 Upper limit of frequency 0.01Hz 50.00Hz ○
LIMIT F0.05
LOWER FREQ
F0.13 Lower limit of frequency 0.00~upper limit of frequency F0.12 0.01Hz 0.00Hz ○
LIMIT
0: User-defined V/F curve(decided by F0.15~F0.20)
V/F CURVE 1: Torque-stepdown characteristic curve 1 (2.0 order)
F0.14 V/F curve setting 1 0 ×
MODE 2: Torque-stepdown characteristic curve 2 (1.7 order)
3: Torque-stepdown characteristic curve 3 (1.2 order)
F0.15 V/F frequency value F3 V/F FREQ3 F0.17~F0.06 0.01Hz 0.00Hz ×

F0.16 V/F voltage value V3 V/F VOLT3 F0.18~100.0% 0.1% 0.0% ×

F0.17 V/F frequency value F2 V/F FREQ2 F0.19~F0.15 0.01Hz 0.00Hz ×

F0.18 V/F voltage value V2 V/F VOLT2 F0.20~F0.16 0.1% 0.0% ×

F0.19 V/F frequency value F1 V/F FREQ1 0.00~F0.17 0.01Hz 0.00Hz ×

F0.20 V/F voltage value V1 V/F VOLT1 0~F0.18 0.1% 0.0% ×

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

92 Appendix 1 Parameters

Group F0: Basic Operating Parameters

Para. Name LCD Display Setting range Unit Factory setting Modif.
Cut-off point of manual 0.0~50.0% ( ratio of cut-off frequency to setting of
F0.21 BOOST RANGE 0.1% 10.0% ○
torque boost F0.06 )

Group F1: Reference frequency parameters

Factory
Para. Name LCD Display Setting range Unit Modif.
setting
Units place of LED:VCI frequency curve selection
0:Curve 1 1:Curve 2
Selection of frequency Ten’s place of LED:CCI frequency curve selection
F1.00 REF CURVE SELE 1 000 ○
reference curve 0:Curve 1 1:Curve 2
Hundred’s place of LED: Pulse frequency curve selection
0:Curve 1 1:Curve 2
Gain of reference
F1.01 REF CHAN GAIN 0.00~9.99 0.01 1.00 ○
selector
Reference time constant
F1.02 FILTER CONST 0.01~50.00s 0.01s 0.50s ○
of filter
Maximum input pulse
F1.03 MAX INPUT PULSE 0.1~50.0k 0.1k 10.0k ○
frequency
Minimum reference of 0.0%~F1.06 (Ratio between Min reference 1 and base value
F1.04 MIN REF1 0.1% 0.0% ○
curve 1 of 10V/20mA/F1.03)
Frequency
F1.05 corresponding to Min. REF1 LOW FREQ 0.00~F0.05 1 0.00Hz ○
reference 1
F1.04~100.0% (Ratio between Max reference 1 and base
F1.06 Max reference 1 MAX REF1 0.1% 100.0% ○
value of 10V/20mA/F1.03)
Frequency
F1.07 corresponding to Max REF1 HIGH FREQ 0.00~F0.05 1 50.00Hz ○
reference 1
0.0%~F1.10
F1.08 Min reference 2 MIN REF2 (Ratio between Min reference 2 and base value of 0.1% 0.0% ○
10V/20mA/F1.03)
Frequency
F1.09 corresponding to Min REF2 LOW FREQ 0.00~F0.05 1 0.00Hz ○
reference 2
F1.08~100.0%
F1.10 Max reference 2 MAX REF2 (Ratio between Max reference and base value of 0.1% 100.0% ○
10V/20mA/F1.03)
Frequency
F1.11 corresponding to Max REF2 HIGH FREQ 0.00~F0.05 1 50.00Hz ○
reference2

Note:
In order to be simple, all the analog value is expressed by voltage value. The formula that converts the current(mA) into
voltage(V) is: Voltage(V) =Current (mA)/2.
Group F2: Starting and Braking Parameters
Factory
Para. Name LCD Display Setting range Unit Modif.
setting
0:start at start frequency
1:brake first, then start at start frequency
2:Start on the fly(including direction judgement), start at
F2.00 Start mode START MODE start frequency when speed is zero 1 0 ×
Note: Starting process includes switching on the drive for
the first time, recover of AC supply after power failure,
reset upon external fault and coast-to-stop
F2.01 Start frequency START FREQ 0.20~60.00Hz 0.01Hz 0.50Hz ○
Start frequency holding
F2.02 HOLD TIME 0.0~10.0s 0.1s 0.0s ○
time
Depending on the type of the drive
DC injection braking BRAK CURR AT P type: 0.0～80.0% of drive’s rated current
F2.03 0.1% 0.0% ○
current at start START
G type: 0.0～100.0% of drive’s rated current

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

 Appendix 1 Parameters 93

Group F2: Starting and Braking Parameters

Factory
Para. Name LCD Display Setting range Unit Modif.
setting
DC injection braking
F2.04 BRAK TIME 0.0 (disabled), 0.1～30.0s 0.1s 0.0s ○
time at start
0:Linear Accelerating / decelerating mode
Accelerating/deceleratin
F2.05 ACC/DEC MODE 1:S curve 1 0 ×
g mode selection
2:Auto Accelerating/decelerating
S CURVE START 10.0%~50.0%(Acc/Dec time)
F2.06 Start section of S curve 0.1% 20.0% ○
SEC F2.06+F2.07≤90%
10.0%~80.0%(Acc/Dec time)
F2.07 Rising time of S curve S CURVE UP 0.1% 60.0% ○
F2.06+F2.07≤90%
0: Dec to stop
F2.08 Stopping Mode STOP MODE 1: Coast to stop 1 0 ×
2: Dec to stop plus DC injection braking
DC injection braking
F2.09 INI BRAK FREQ 0.00~60.00Hz 0.01Hz 0.00Hz ○
initial frequency at stop
DC injection braking
F2.10 BRAK WAIT TIME 0.00~10.00s 0.01s 0.00s ○
waiting time at stop
Depending on the type of the drive
DC injection braking BRAK CURR AT P type: 0.0～80.0% of drive’s rated current
F2.11 0.1% 0.0% ○
current at stop STOP
G type: 0.0～100.0% of drive’s rated current
DC injection braking BRAK TIME AT
F2.12 0.0 (disabled), 0.1～30.0s 0.1s 0.0s ○
time at stop STOP
0: Dynamic braking is not used
F2.13 Dynamic braking BRAK UNIT SELE 1 0 ×
1: Dynamic braking is used
Ratio of working time of 0.0~100.0%
UTILITY OF BRAK
F2.14 braking kit to drive’s Note: valid for the built-in braking kit of 5.5/7.5kW drive 0.1% 2.0% ×
UNIT
total working time and dynamic braking should be applied in Dec process

Group F3: Auxiliary parameters

Factory
Para. Name LCD Display Setting range Unit Modif.
setting
F3.00 Run reverse disabled RUN REV DISABLE 0:Run reverse enabled 1:Run reverse disabled 1 0 ×

Run reverse/forward dead

F3.01 FWD/REV DEAD TIME 0~3600s 0.1s 0.0s ○
time
F3.02 Reserved RESERVED - - 0 *

F3.03 Reserved RESERVED - - 0 *

F3.04 Reserved RESERVED - - 0 *

Auto energy saving
F3.05 ENERGY-SAVING OPR 0:disabled 1:enabled 1 0 ×
operation
0: disabled 1:enabled
F3.06 AVR function AVR FUNC 1 2 ×
2: disabled in decelerating process
SLIP COMPENSATION
F3.07 Gain of Slip compensation 0.0%~300.0% 0.1% 100.0% ○
GAIN

F3.08 Slip compensation limit SLIP COMPENSATION 0.0%~250.0% 0.1% 200.0% ○

LIMIT

F3.09 Compensation time COMPENSATION TIME 0.1~25.0s 0.1s 2.0s ×

CONST
Type G: 5.5kW～45kW
Type P: 7.5kW～55kW: 15k～3k
8.0kHz
Carrier frequency Type G: 55kW～90kW
F3.10 CARRIER FREQ 0.1kHz 3.0kHz ○
adjustment Type P: 75kW～110kW: 10k～1k
2.0kHz
Type G: 110kW～220kW
Type P: 132kW～280kW: 6k～0.7k
Carrier frequency CARRIER FREQ 0:disabled
F3.11 1 1 ○
auto-tuning REGULATION SELE 1:Enabled

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

94 Appendix 1 Parameters

Group F3: Auxiliary parameters

Factory
Para. Name LCD Display Setting range Unit Modif.
setting
F3.12 Motor tone adjustment MOTOR TUNING 0~10 1 0 ○

F3.13 Jog frequency JOG OPR FREQ 0.10~50.00Hz 0.01Hz 5.00Hz ○

F3.14 Jog interval JOG INTERVAL TIME 0.0~100.0s 0.1s 0.0s ○

F3.15 Acc time of Jog operation JOG ACC TIME

0.1~60.0s 0.1 ○
F3.16 Dec time of Jog operation JOG DEC TIME

F3.17 Acc time 2 ACC TIME2 5.5kW~

22kWG:
F3.18 Dec time 2 DEC TIME2
6.0s
F3.19 Acc time 3 ACC TIME3 0.1~3600 30kW~
Note: 0.1 280kWP: ○
F3.20 Dec time 3 DEC TIME3 Default unit is second; unit of Acc/Dec time is decided by F9.09 20.0s
F3.21 Acc time 4 ACC TIME4

F3.22 Dec time 4 DEC TIME4

F3.23 Preset frequency 1 MULTIBAND FREQ 1 5.00Hz

F3.24 Preset frequency 2 MULTIBAND FREQ 2 10.00Hz

F3.25 Preset frequency 3 MULTIBAND FREQ 3 20.00Hz

F3.26 Preset frequency 4 MULTIBAND FREQ 4 F0.13 (Lower limit of frequency) ~F0.12(upper limit of frequency) 0.01Hz 30.00Hz ○

F3.27 Preset frequency 5 MULTIBAND FREQ 5 40.00Hz

F3.28 Preset frequency 6 MULTIBAND FREQ 6 45.00Hz

F3.29 Preset frequency 7 MULTIBAND FREQ 7 50.00Hz

F3.30 Skip frequency 1 SKIP FREQ1 0.00~650.0Hz 0.01Hz 0.00Hz ×

F3.31 Range of skip frequency 1 SKIP FREQ BAND1 0.00~30.00Hz 0.01Hz 0.00Hz ×

F3.32 Skip frequency 2 SKIP FREQ2 0.00~650.0Hz 0.01Hz 0.00Hz ×

F3.33 Range of skip frequency 2 SKIP FREQ BAND2 0.00~30.00Hz 0.01Hz 0.00Hz ×

F3.34 Skip frequency 3 SKIP FREQ3 0.00~650.0Hz 0.01Hz 0.00Hz ×

F3.35 Range of skip frequency 3 SKIP FREQ BAND3 0.00~30.00Hz 0.01Hz 0.00Hz ×

Group F4: Operating Parameters

Factory
Para Name LCD Display Setting range Unit Modif.
setting
Unit’s place of LED: PLC operation mode
0:disabled 1:Stop after operating for 1 cycle
2: Holding at the final value after single cycle of operation
3:Operate continuously
Ten’s place of LED: Restarting mode after stopping
PLC operation 0:Run again from phase 1
PLC OPR
F4.00 mode 1:Continue to run from the stopping phase 1 0000 ×
MODE
selection 2:Operate at the time and frequency when the drive stops or fault occurs
Hundred’s place of LED: Save at power off
0:Not saving
1:Save the time and frequency at power off
Thousand’s place of LED: selecting the unit of time
0:second 1:Minute
Unit’s place of LED: Frequency setting
0:Pre-set frequency 1(F3.23) 1:Decided by F0.00 parameter
2:Close loop reference 1(F5.20) 3:Decided by F5.01 parameter
Ten’s place of LED: Running direction selection
STAGE 1
F4.01 Phase 1 setup 0:Run forward 1:Run reverse 1 000 ○
SET
2:Decided by operating instructions
Hundred’s place of LED:Acc/Dec time selection
0:Acc/Dec time 1 1:Acc/Dec time 2
2:Acc/Dec time 3 3:Acc/Dec time 4

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

 Appendix 1 Parameters 95

Group F4: Operating Parameters

Factory
Para Name LCD Display Setting range Unit Modif.
setting
Operating time STAGE 1
F4.02 0.0 ~ 6500 0.1 20.0 ○
in Phase 1 TIME
Unit’s place of LED: Frequency setting
0:Pre-set frequency 2(F3.24) 1:Decided by F0.00 parameter
2:Close loop reference 2(F5.21) 3:Decided by F5.01 parameter
Ten’s place of LED: Running direction selection
STAGE 2
F4.03 Phase 2 setup 0:Run forward 1:Run reverse 1 000 ○
SET
2:Decided by operating instructions
Hundred’s place of LED: Acc/Dec time selection
0:Acc/Dec time 1 1:Acc/Dec time 2
2:Acc/Dec time 3 3:Acc/Dec time 4
Operating time STAGE 2
F4.04 0.0 ~ 6500 0.1 20.0 ○
in Phase 2 TIME
Unit’s place of LED: Frequency setting
0:Pre-set frequency 3(F3.25) 1:Decided by F0.00 parameter
2:Close loop reference 3(F5.22) 3:Decided by F5.01 parameter
Ten’s place of LED: Running direction selection
STAGE 3
F4.05 Phase 3 setup 0:Run forward 1:Run reverse 1 000 ○
SET
2:Decided by operating instructions
Hundred’s place of LED: Acc/Dec time selection
0:Acc/Dec time 1 1:Acc/Dec time 2
2:Acc/Dec time 3 3:Acc/Dec time 4
Operating time STAGE 3
F4.06 0.0 ~ 6500 0.1 20.0 ○
in Phase 3 TIME
Unit’s place of LED: Frequency setting
0:Pre-set frequency 4(F3.26) 1:Decided by F0.00 parameter
2:Close loop reference 4(F5.23) 3:Decided by F5.01 parameter
Ten’s place of LED: Running direction selection
STAGE 4
F4.07 Phase 4 setup 0:Run forward 1:Run reverse 1 000 ○
SET
2:Decided by operating instructions
Hundred’s place of LED: Acc/Dec time selection
0:Acc/Dec time 1 1:Acc/Dec time 2
2:Acc/Dec time 3 3:Acc/Dec time 4
Operating time STAGE 4
F4.08 0.0 ~ 6500 0.1 20.0 ○
in Phase 4 TIME
Unit’s place of LED: Frequency setting
0:Pre-set frequency 5(F3.27) 1:Decided by F0.00 parameter
2:Close loop reference 5(F5.24) 3:Decided by F5.01 parameter
Ten’s place of LED: Running direction selection
STAGE 5
F4.09 Phase 5 setup 0:Run forward 1:Run reverse 1 000 ○
SET
2:Decided by operating instructions
Hundred’s place of LED: Acc/Dec time selection
0:Acc/Dec time 1 1:Acc/Dec time 2
2:Acc/Dec time 3 3:Acc/Dec time 4
Operating time STAGE 5
F4.10 0.0 ~ 6500 0.1 20.0 ○
in Phase 5 TIME
Unit’s place of LED: Frequency setting
0:Pre-set frequency 6(F3.28) 1:Decided by F0.00 parameter
2:Close loop reference 6(F5.25) 3:Decided by F5.01 parameter
Ten’s place of LED: Running direction selection
STAGE 6
F4.11 Phase 6 setup 0:Run forward 1:Run reverse 1 000 ○
SET
2:Decided by operating instructions
Hundred’s place of LED: Acc/Dec time selection
0:Acc/Dec time 1 1:Acc/Dec time 2
2:Acc/Dec time 3 3:Acc/Dec time 4
Operating time STAGE 6
F4.12 0.0 ~ 6500 0.1 20.0 ○
in Phase 6 TIME

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

96 Appendix 1 Parameters

Group F4: Operating Parameters

Factory
Para Name LCD Display Setting range Unit Modif.
setting
Unit’s place of LED: Frequency setting
0:Pre-set frequency 7(F3.29) 1:Decided by F0.00 parameter
2:Close loop reference 7(F5.26) 3:Decided by F5.01 parameter
Ten’s place of LED: Running direction selection
STAGE 7
F4.13 Phase 7 setup 0:Run forward 1:Run reverse 1 000 ○
SET
2:Decided by operating instructions
Hundred’s place of LED: Acc/Dec time selection
0:Acc/Dec time 1 1:Acc/Dec time 2
2:Acc/Dec time 3 3:Acc/Dec time 4
Operating time STAGE 7
F4.14 0.0 ~ 6500 0.1 20.0 ○
in Phase 7 TIME

Group F5: Close-loop control parameters

Factory
Para. Name LCD Display Setting range Unit Modif.
setting
Close-loop function CLOSELOOP FUNC 0:disabled
F5.00 1 0 ×
selection SELE 1:enabled
0:Digital input; (F5.02=6, F5.06, others, F5.05)
1:VCI; 2: CCI;
Reference channel
F5.01 REF CHAN SELE Note: For speed-loop, analog reference of 10V 1 1 ○
selection
corresponds to the maximum frequency defined by
F0.05
0:VCI (0~10V) 1:CCI (analog input)
2:VCI+CCI 3:VCI-CCI
Feedback channel
F5.02 FEEDBACK CHAN SELE 4:Min{VCI,CCI} 5:Max{VCI,CCI} 1 1 ○
selection
6:Pulse; (PG close loop signal/dual loop is decided
by terminal)
Filter of reference
F5.03 REF FILTER CONST 0.01~50.00s 0.01s 0.50s ○
channel
Filter of feedback FEEDBACK FILTER
F5.04 0.01~50.00s 0.01s 0.50s ○
channel CONST
Set reference in digital
F5.05 DIGITAL REF 0.00V~10.00V 0.01 0.00 ○
mode
Speed reference set in
F5.06 CLOSELOOP REF 0~39000rpm 1 0 ○
close loop
F5.07 PG setting PULSE NUMBER SELE 1~9999 1 1024 ○
0.0%~(F5.10) (Ratio of Min reference to base
F5.08 Min reference MIN REF 0.1% 0.0 ○
value of 10V/20mA)
Feedback value 0.0~100.0%
F5.09 corresponding to the Min MIN FEEDBACK (Ratio of Min reference to base value of 0.1% 20.0% ○
reference 10V/20mA)
(F5.08)~100.0% (Ratio of Max reference to
F5.10 Max reference MAX REF 0.1% 100.0% ○
base value of 10V/20mA)
Feedback value 0.0~100%
F5.11 corresponding to the MAX FEEDBACK (Ratio of Max reference to base value of 0.1% 100.0% ○
Max reference 10V/20mA)
F5.12 Proportional gain KP PROPORTION GAIN 0.000~9.999 0.001 0.050 ○

F5.13 Integral gain Ki INTEGRATION GAIN 0.000~9.999 0.001 0.050 ○

F5.14 Sampling cycle SAMPLE CYCLE 0.01~50.00s 0.01s 0.50s ○

F5.15 Limits of deviation ERROR LIMIT 0.0~20.0%(corresponding to close loop reference) 0.1% 2.0% ○
Close loop adjustment 0:Forward 1:Reverse
F5.16 CLOSELOOP FEATURE 1 0 ×
characteristic Note: reference has no connection with speed
0:Stop the Integral adjustment when the frequency
Integral adjustment reaches the upper limit or lower limit.
F5.17 INTEGRATION SELE 1 0 ×
selection 1:Continue the Integral adjustment when the
frequency reaches the upper limit or lower limit.

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

 Appendix 1 Parameters 97

Group F5: Close-loop control parameters

Factory
Para. Name LCD Display Setting range Unit Modif.
setting
Close-loop preset CLOSELOOP PRESET
F5.18 0.00~650.0Hz 0.01Hz 0.00Hz ○
frequency FREQ
Holding time of
F5.19 close-loop preset PRESET HOLD TIME 0.0~3600s 0.1s 0.0s ×
frequency
Preset close-loop
F5.20 CLOSELOOP REF1 0.00V~10.00V 0.01V 0.00V ○
reference 1
Preset close-loop
F5.21 CLOSELOOP REF2 0.00V~10.00V 0.01V 0.00V ○
reference 2
Preset close-loop
F5.22 CLOSELOOP REF3 0.00V~10.00V 0.01V 0.00V ○
reference 3
Preset close-loop
F5.23 CLOSELOOP REF4 0.00V~10.00V 0.01V 0.00V ○
reference 4
Preset close-loop
F5.24 CLOSELOOP REF5 0.00V~10.00V 0.01V 0.00V ○
reference 5
Preset close-loop
F5.25 CLOSELOOP REF6 0.00V~10.00V 0.01V 0.00V ○
reference 6
Preset close-loop
F5.26 CLOSELOOP REF7 0.00V~10.00V 0.01V 0.00V ○
reference 7

Group F6: Textile Operating Function Parameters

Factory
Para. Name LCD Display Setting Range Unit Modif.
Setting
Textile function TEXTILE FUNC
F6.00 0:Disabled 1:Enabled 1 0 ×
selection SELE
Unit’s place of LED: start mode
0:Auto mode (according to F6.03)
1:Manual mode
Ten’s place of LED: traverse operating amplitude
control
0:Variable amplitude
1:Fixed amplitude
Traverse operation SWING CTR Hundred’s place of LED: stopping mode of traverse
F6.01 1 0000 ×
control mode MODE operation
0:Start at the frequency and direction memorized
before stopping
1:Re-start
Thousand’s place of LED: save parameters upon
power outage
0:Saving traverse operating status at power outage
1:Not saving traverse operating status at power outage
Pre-traverse SWING BASE
F6.02 0.00Hz~650.0Hz 0.01Hz 0.00Hz ○
frequency FREQ
Waiting time before SWING WAIT
F6.03 0.0~3600.0s 0.1s 0.0s ○
traverse TIME
Traverse operating SWING
F6.04 0.0~50.0% 0.1% 0.0% ○
amplitude AMPLITUDE
F6.05 Jitter frequency JUMP FREQ 0.0~50.0% (with reference to F6.04) 0.1% 0.0% ○
Traverse operating
F6.06 SWING CYCLE 0.1~999.9s 0.1s 10.0s ○
cycle
Rising time of 0.0~100.0% (with reference to traverse operating
F6.07 RISE TIME 0.1% 50.0% ○
triangle wave cycle)

Note:
The central frequency is the default present frequency setting (Settings of traverse operation are not active in Jog and close-loop
operation mode)

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

98 Appendix 1 Parameters

Group 7: Terminal Function Parameters

Factory
Para. Name LCD Display Setting Range Unit Modif
setting
Function of 0:No function
TERMINAL
F7.00 multi-function 1:Preseting frequency 1
X1 FUNC
terminal X1 2:Preseting frequency 2
3:Preseting frequency 3
4:Setting Acc/Dec time 1
Function of 5:Setting Acc/Dec time 2
TERMINAL
F7.01 multi-function 6:Normally open input terminal for external fault signal
X2 FUNC
terminal X2 7:Normally open input terminal for external fault signal
8:Terminal for external reset signal (RESET)
9:Terminal for inputting Jog running forward command
10:Terminal for inputting Jog running reverse command
11:Coast to stop (FRS)
Function of
TERMINAL 12:Terminal for inputting command of increasing frequency (UP)
F7.02 multi-function
X3 FUNC 13:Terminal for inputting command of decreasing frequency (DN)
terminal X3
14: Terminal for inputting command of pausing PLC operation
15: Terminal for inputting command of disabling Acc/Dec
16: Terminal for 3-wire operation control
17: Normally open contacts for input external interruption
Function of 18: Normally closed contacts for input external interruption
TERMINAL
F7.03 multi-function 19:DC injection braking at stop
X4 FUNC
terminal X4 20:close loop inactive
21:PLC inactive
22:reference frequency input channel 1
23:reference frequency input channel 2
24:reference frequency input channel 3
Function of 1 0 ×
TERMINAL 25:Frequency reference is input via terminal CCI forcibly
F7.04 multi-function 26:Reserved
X5 FUNC
terminal X5 27:Terminal control mode is forcibly enabled
28:Command input channel 1
29:Command input channel 2
30:Multi-voltage terminal 1
31:Multi-voltage terminal 2
Function of
TERMINAL 32:Multi-voltage terminal 3
F7.05 multi-function
X5 FUNC 33:Start of traverse operation
terminal X6
34:Clear the traverse operation status
35:external stopping command(valid for all control mode)
36:Reserved
37:Drive operation disabled
Function of 38:Reserved
TERMINAL
F7.06 multi-function 39:Clear the length
X7 FUNC
terminal X7 40:Clear the auxiliary reference frequency
41:Clear the memorized information at the stop process of PLC
operation
42:Counter clearing signal input
43:Counter trigger signal input
Function of 44:Length data input
TERMINAL
F7.07 multi-function 45:Pulse frequency input
X7 FUNC
terminal X8 46:Single phase speed measuring input
47:speed measuring input SM1(only for X7)
48:speed measuring input SM2(only for X8)
0: 2-wire operation mode 1
1: 2-wire operation mode 2
FWD/REV
OPR CTR 2:3-wire control mode 1-self holding function(any terminal of terminals
F7.08 running mode 1 0 ×
MODE X1~X8)
setup
3:3-wire control mode 2-self holding function(any terminal of terminals
X1~X8)
F7.09 UP/DN speed UP/DN SPEED 0.01~99.99Hz/s 0.01Hz/s 1.00Hz/s ○

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

 Appendix 1 Parameters 99

Group 7: Terminal Function Parameters

Factory
Para. Name LCD Display Setting Range Unit Modif
setting
0:Running signal(RUN)
Bi-direction 1:frequency arriving signal(FAR)
open 2:frequency detection threshold (FDT1)
Y1 FUNC
F7.10 collector 3:frequency detection threshold (FDT2) 1 0 ×
SELE
output 4:overload signal(OL)
terminal Y1 5:low voltage signal(LU)
6:external fault signal(EXT)
7:frequency high limit(FHL)
Bi-direction
8:frequency low limit(FLL)
open
Y2 FUNC 9:zero-speed running
F7.11 collector 1 1 ×
SELE 10:Completion of simple PLC operation
output
11:PLC cycle completion indication
terminal Y2
12:preset counting value arriving
13:specified counting value arriving
14:reference length arriving indication
Function 15:drive ready (RDY)
RELAY 16:drive fault
F7.12 selection of 1 16 ×
OUTPUT 17:extended functions of host
output relay
18:Upper and lower limits of traverse operating frequency
19: preset operating time out
F7.13 FAR duration FAR RANGE 0.00~650.0Hz 0.01Hz 2.50Hz ○
F7.14 FDT1 level FDT1 LEVEL 0.00~650.0Hz 0.01Hz 50.00Hz ○
F7.15 FDT1 lag FDT1 LAG 0.00~650.0Hz 0.01Hz 1.00Hz ○
F7.16 FDT2 level FDT2 LEVEL 0.00~650.0Hz 0.01Hz 25.00Hz ○
F7.17 FDT2 lag FDT2 LAG 0.00~650.0Hz 0.01Hz 1.00Hz ○
F7.18
~ Reserved RESERVED - - 0 *
F7.25
0: Output frequency before slip compensation (0~Max output frequency)
Functions of ANALOG 1:Output frequency after slip compensation (0~Max output frequency)
F7.26 1 0 ○
terminal AO1 OUTPUT1 2:Preset frequency (0~Max output frequency)
3:Output current (0~2 times of drive’s rated current)
4:Output current (0~2 times of motor’s rated current)
Functions of ANALOG 5:Output torque (0~2 times of motor’s rated torque)
F7.27 1 3 ○
terminal AO2 OUTPUT2 6:Output voltage (0~1.2 times of drive’s rated voltage)
7:Bus voltage (0~800V)
Functions of 8:VCI (0~10V)
terminal DO(no DIGITAL 9:CCI (0~10V/0~20mA)
F7.28 1 0 ○
output when OUPUT 10:Output power (0~2 times of rated power)
F7.07=44~46) 11:Extended function of host 2(0~65535)
Unit’s place of LED: AO1 offset selection
ANALOG
Analog output 0: 0~10V or 0~20Ma 1: 2~10V or 4~20mA
F7.29 OUTPUT 1 00 ○
range Ten’s place of LED: AO2 offset selection
OFFSET
0:0~10V or 0~20mA 1: 2~10V or 4~20mA
AO1 output
F7.30 A01 CALIB 0.0~200.0% 0.1% 100.0% ○
gain
AO2 output
F7.31 A02 CALIB 0.0~200.0% 0.1% 100.0% ○
gain
Maximum
output MAX
F7.32 OUTPUT 0.1~50.0 (up to 50k) 0.1 10.0k ○
frequency of
PULSE
DO
Preset counting
F7.33 value reaches SET COUNT F7.34~9999 1 0 ○
VALUE
reference value
Specified SPECIFIED
F7.34 0~F7.33 1 0 ○
counting value COUNT

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

 100 Appendix 1 Parameters

Group 7: Terminal Function Parameters

Factory
Para. Name LCD Display Setting Range Unit Modif
setting
reaches VALUE
reference value
Binary setting:
Positive logic: Terminal Xi is enabled if it is connected to
corresponding common terminal, and disabled if it is disconnected;
Terminal’s TERMINAL Negative logic: Terminal Xi is disabled if it is connected to
F7.35 positive and ENABLE 1 000 ○
corresponding common terminal, and enabled is it is disconnected;
negative logic STATE
Unit’s place of LED: Bit0~Bit3:X1~X4
Ten’s place of LED: Bit0~Bit3:X5~X8
Hundred’s place of LED: Bit0~Bit1:FWD. REV, Bit2~Bit3:Y1. Y2

Group F8: Display Parameters

Factory
Para. Name LCD Display Setting Range Unit Modif.
Setting
Language selection LANGUAGE 0:Chinese 1:English
F8.00 1 0 ○
(Chinese/ English) SELECT Note: This function is only applicable for LCD panel
Binary settings:
0:No display; 1:Display
Unit’s place of LED:
Bit0: Output frequency (Hz) (before compensation)
OPR DISPLAY1 Bit1: Output frequency (Hz) (after compensation)
Bit2: Reference frequency (Hz flashes)
(Not flash, ▲ Bit3:Output current(A)
and ▼ keys are
Ten’s place of LED:
Parameter group 1 valid only in
F8.01 frequency and Bit0:Spinning speed(R/MIN) 1 3FF ○
displayed during operation
speed displaying Bit1:Reference speed(R/MIN flashes)
status; The Bit2: Line speed(M/S)
status will be Bit3:Reference line speed(M/S flashes)
saved at power
off) Hundred’s place of LED:
Bit0:Output power
Bit1:Output torque(％)
Note: The frequency before compensation will be
displayed if all the Bits are 0.
Binary settings:
0:No display; 1:Display
Unit’s place of LED:
OPR DISPLAY2 Bit0:Output voltage(V) Bit1:Bus voltage
Bit2:VCI(V) Bit3:CCI(V)
Parameter group 1 (nor flash; the Ten’s place of LED:
F8.02 1 000 ○
displayed during operation status will be Bit0: Analog close loop feedback(%)
saved at power Bit1: Analog close loop feedback(% flashes)
off) Bit2: External counting value(no unit)
Bit3: Terminal status(no unit)
Hundred’s place of LED:
Bit0: Actual length Bit1: reference length

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

 Appendix 1 Parameters 101

Group F8: Display Parameters

Factory
Para. Name LCD Display Setting Range Unit Modif.
Setting
Binary settings:
0:No display; 1:Display
Unit’s place of LED:
Bit0: Reference frequency(Hz)
Bit1: External counting value(no unit)
Bit2: Spinning speed(R/MIN)
Bit3: Reference speed(R/MIN)
STOP DISPLAY
Ten’s place of LED:
Bit0: Line speed(M/S)
(flashes, ▲ and
Bit1: Reference line speed(M/S)
▼ key are valid
Parameter displayed at Bit2: VCI(V)
F8.03 in frequency 1 1FF ○
STOP state Bit3: CCI(V)
displaying status;
Hundred’s place of LED:
the status will be
Bit0: Analog close loop feedback(%)
saved at power
Bit1:Analog close loop setup(%)
off)
Bit2: Actual length
Bit3: Reference length
Thousand’s place of LED:
Bit0: Terminal status(no unit)
Bit1: Bus voltage
Note: The reference frequency will be displayed in
default if all the Bits are 0
0.1~999.9%
Spinning speed = actual spinning speed*F8.04(PG)
Spinning speed=
120*operating Frequency/FH.00*F8.04(non PG)
Coefficient of displayed SPEED
F8.04 Reference speed = 0.1% 100.0% ○
speed FACTOR
close loop reference speed*F8.04(PG)
Reference speed=
120*reference frequency/FH.00*F8.04(non PG))
Note: No influence to actual speed
0.1~999.9%
Line speed = running frequency*F8.05(non PG))
Line speed = spinning speed*F8.05(PG)
Coefficient of displayed line LINE SPEED
F8.05 Reference line speed = reference frequency*F8.05(non 0.1% 1.0% ○
speed FACTOR
PG))
Reference line speed=reference speed*F8.05(PG)
Note: No influence to actual speed
Coefficient of displayed CLOSELOOP 0.1~999.9%
F8.06 analog close loop DISPLAY Note: Analog close loop reference/feedback displaying 0.1% 100.0% ○
parameter/ feedback FACTOR range:0~999.9

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

102 Appendix 1 Parameters

Group F9: Enhanced Functional Parameters

Factory
Para. Name LCD Display Setting range Unit Modif.
setting
Unit’s place of LED: Select the frequency reference selector in
panel control mode
0:No bundling
1:Digital setting 1(set via ▲ and ▼)
2:Digital setting 2(set via terminal UP/DN)
3:Digital setting 3(set via serial port)
4:Set the reference via VCI
5:Set the reference via CCI
6:Set in pulse mode via terminals
Ten’s place of LED: Select the frequency reference selector in
terminal control mode
0: No bundling
Control mode is
FREQ-COM 1:Digital setting 1(set via ▲ and ▼)
bundled to
F9.00 MAND 2:Digital setting 2(set via terminal UP/DN) 1 000 ○
frequency
ATTACHING 3:Digital setting 3(set via serial port)
selector
4:Set the reference via VCI
5:Set the reference via CCI
6:Set in pulse mode via terminals
Hundred’s place of LED: Select the frequency reference selector
in serial port control mode
0: No bundling
1:Digital setting 1(set via ▲ and ▼)
2:Digital setting 2(set via terminal UP/DN)
3:Digital setting 3(set via serial port)
4:Set the reference via VCI
5:Set the reference via CCI
6:Set in pulse mode via terminals
0:No auxiliary reference frequency;
1:Digital setting 1, set by ▲ and ▼(given by F9.03 directly);
2:Digital setting 2, set by terminal UP/DN (given by F9.03
directly);
3:Digital setting 3, set by serial port(given by F9.03 directly);
4:Set the reference via VCI
5:Set the reference via CCI
Auxiliary
6:Set in pulse mode via terminals
F9.01 reference AUX REF 1 0 ○
4:Set the reference via VCI
channel
5:Set the reference via CCI
9:Set in pulse mode via terminals
10:VCI-5;
11:CCI-5;
12:PULSE-0.5×F1.03
Note: Disabled together with main reference selector frequencies
in items 4~12 use the setting of F1.00.
Auxiliary
AUX REF
F9.02 reference 0.00~9.99(only for F9.01=4~12) 0.01 1.00 ○
FACTOR
coefficient
Initial auxiliary
F9.03 AUX FREQ 0.00~650.0Hz 0.01 0.00Hz ○
frequency
Unit’s place of LED: Saving control
0:Saving auxiliary frequency at power off
1:Not saving auxiliary frequency at power off
Auxiliary Ten’s place of LED:
AUX FREQ
F9.04 frequency 0:Holding auxiliary frequency at stop 1 000 ○
CTR
control 1:Clearing reference frequency at stop
Hundred’s place of LED: polarities of frequency
0:Positive 1:Negative
Note: Only valued at F9.01=1, 2 or 3

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

 Appendix 1 Parameters 103

Group F9: Enhanced Functional Parameters

Factory
Para. Name LCD Display Setting range Unit Modif.
setting
Frequency 0:Disabled 1:Percentage of F005
F9.05 FREQ ADJ 1 0 ○
adjustment 2:Percentage of present frequency
Adjustment
coefficient of ADJ
F9.06 0.0%~200.0% 0.1% 100.0% ○
reference FACTOR
frequency
Unit’s place of LED:STOP/RESET key’s function selection
0:Valid in panel control mode
1:Stop in stopping mode in panel, terminal and serial port control
mode
2:Coast to stop in non-panel control mode, stop in stopping mode
in panel control mode
Ten’s place of LED: function of PANEL/REMOTE key
0:Inactive
KEY FUNC
F9.07 Function of keys 1:Stopping status active 1 000 ×
SELE
2:Valid in stopping and running modes
Hundred’s place of LED: Keypad locking function
0:No locking
1:Locked
2:All the keys except the STOP/RESET key are locked
3:All the keys except the SHIFT key are locked
4:All the keys except the RUN and STOP/RESET keys are
locked
0:Auto operation mode
Cooling fan
F9.08 FAN CTR 1:Fan operate continuously when power is on 1 0 ×
control
Note: Continue to operate for 3 minutes
Unit of
ACC/DEC
F9.09 Accelerating/dec 0: Second 1: Minute 0 0 ×
UNIT
elerating time
F9.10 Drop control DROOP CTR 0.00~10.00Hz 0.01Hz 0.00Hz ○
OVER
Overshoot 0:Disabled
F9.11 MODULATIO 1 1 ×
enabled 1:Enabled
N ENABLE
Zero-frequency
ZERO FREQ
F9.12 operation 0.00~650.00Hz 0.01Hz 0.00Hz ○
THRESHOLD
threshold
Zero-frequency ZERO FREQ
F9.13 0.00~650.00Hz 0.01Hz 0.00Hz ○
hysteresis HYSTERESIS
Reference
length LENGTH
F9.14 0.000(function of stopping at fixed length is disabled)~65.535km 0.001km 0.000km ○
(Stop at fixed SET
length)
Actual length
F9.15 (Saving at power LENGTH 0.000~65.535km( saving at power off) 0.001km 0.000km ○
off)
LENGTH
F9.16 Ratio of length 0.001~30.000 0.001 1.000 ○
SCALE
Length
LENGTH
F9.17 correction 0.001~1.000 0.001 1.000 ○
CALIBRATION
coefficient
F9.18 Perimeter of axis SHAFT GIRTH 0.01~100.00cm 0.01cm 10.00cm ○
Number of PULSES
F9.19 1~9999 1 1 ○
pulses per cycle PER CYCLE
Trip-free NO STOP 0: Disabled
F9.20 operating DURING 1: Enabled (low voltage compensation) 1 0 ×
function P.OFF (Valid for the drive below 15kW)

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

104 Appendix 1 Parameters

Group F9: Enhanced Functional Parameters

Factory
Para. Name LCD Display Setting range Unit Modif.
setting
Frequency
decrease rate at FREQ SLOW
F9.21 0.00~99.99Hz/s 0.01Hz/S 10.00Hz/s ○
voltage RATE 1
compensation
Function of RESTART
0:Disabled
F9.22 restart after AFTER 1 0 ×
1:Enabled
power failure POFF
Delay time for DELAY TIME
F9.23 restart after BEFORE 0.0~10.0s 0.1s 0.5s ○
power failure RESTART

Note:
① Actual length(km)=﹛ counting value* Perimeter of axis(F9.18)/ Number of pulses per cycle(F9.19)﹜ * Ratio of
length(F9.16)/calibration coefficient of length(F9.17)/100/1000.
② Functions of F9.14~F9.19 are only valid for the drive of 45kW or below.
Group FA: Reserved Parameters
Parameter Name LCD Display Setting range Unit Factory setting Modification
FA.00~FA.11 Reserved RESERVED - - 0 *

Group FF: Communication Parameters

Factory
Para. Name LCD Display Setting range Unit Modif.
setting
Unit’s place of LED: Baud rate selection
0:300bps 1:600bps
2:1200bps 3:2400bps
4:4800bps 5:9600bps
6:19200bps 7:38400bps
Ten’s place of LED: Data format
Communication 0:1-8-1 format, no parity
FF.00 COMM CONFIG 1 0005 ×
configuration 1:1-8-1 format, Even parity
2:1-8-1 format, Odd parity
Hundred’s place of LED: virtual input terminal
0:Disabled 1: Enabled
Thousand’s place of LED: wiring mode
0:Direct connection via cable (RS232/485)
1: MODEM (RS232)
FF.01 Local address LOCAL ADDR 0~126,127 is the broadcasting address 1 1 ×
Time threshold for judging TIMEOUT
FF.02 0.0~1000s 0.1 0.0s ×
the communication status SETTING
Delay for responding to SCI REPLY
FF.03 0~1000ms 1 5ms ×
control PC DELAY

Group FH: Motor Parameters

Para. Name LCD Display Setting range Unit Factory setting Modif.
Number of polarities of MOTOR POLARITY
FH.00 2~14 2 4 ×
motor NUM
FH.01 Rated power RATED POWER 0.4~999.9kW 0.1kW Dependent on drive’s model ×

FH.02 Rated current RATED CURR 0.1~999.9A 0.1A Dependent on drive’s model ×

FH.03 Current without load CURR WITH NO LOAD 0.1~999.9A 0.1A Dependent on drive’s model ×

FH.04 Resistance of stator R1 STATOR RESIS R1 0.00%~50.00% 0.01% Dependent on drive’s model ○

FH.05 Leakage inductance X LEAKAGE INDUC X 0.00%~50.00% 0.01% Dependent on drive’s model ○

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

 Appendix 1 Parameters 105

Group FH: Motor Parameters

Para. Name LCD Display Setting range Unit Factory setting Modif.
FH.06 Resistance of rotor R2 ROTOR RESIS R1 0.00%~50.00% 0.01% Dependent on drive’s model ○

FH.07 Exciting inductance Xm MUTUAL INDUC Xm 0.0%~2000% 0.1% Dependent on drive’s model ○

FH.08 Rated slip RATED SLIP 0.00~20.00Hz 0.01Hz 0.00Hz ○

0:Disabled
Parameter 1:Enabled (motor in standstill
FH.09 PARA AUTOSET 1 0 ×
self-adjustment state)
2:Enabled (motor is running)
Motor stabilization MOTOR STEAD
FH.10 0~255 1 Dependent on drive’s model ○
factor FACTOR
FH.11
~ Reserved RESERVED - - 0 *
FH.21

Group FL: Protection Parameters

Factory
Para. Name LCD display Setting range Unit Modif.
setting
Motor overload 0:Disabled
OVERLOAD
FL.00 protection mode 1:Common motor (with low speed compensation) 1 1 ×
PROTECTION
selection 2:Variable frequency motor (without low speed compensation)
Motor overload
THERMAL
FL.01 protection 20.0~110.0% 0.1% 100.0% ×
RELAY
coefficient setup
Over voltage at OVERVOLT 0:Disabled (when braking resistor is mounted)
FL.02 1 1 ×
stall STALL 1:Enabled
Over voltage point STALL
FL.03 at stall OVERVOLT 120.0~150.0%Udce 0.1% 140.0% ×
REF
Unit’s place of LED:
0:Detect all the time
1:dDtect only at constant speed running
Ten’s place of LED: alarm selection
Overload detection OVERLOAD
FL.04 0: Drive will not alarm, and continue to operate 1 000 ×
setup DETECT
1: Drive alarms and stops
Hundred’s place of LED: selection of detected value
0: % of rated current of motor(E014)
1: % of rated current of drive(E013)
OVERLOAD
FL.05 Overload detection 20.0%~200.0% 0.1% 130.0% ×
LIMIT
Overload detection OVERLOAD
FL.06 0.0~60.0s 0.1s 5.0s ×
time DETECT TIME
Auto current G type:
limiting level 150.0%
FL.07 CURR LIMIT 20.0%~200.0%Ie 0.1% ×
P type:
110%
Frequency
FREQ SLOW 0.01 10.00
FL.08 decrease rate in 0.00~99.99Hz/s ○
RATE 2 Hz/s Hz/s
current limiting
Auto current 0:Invalid at constant speed
AUTO CURR
FL.09 limiting action 1:Valid at constant speed 1 1 ×
LIMIT
selection Note: Acceleration and deceleration are valid
0~10, “0” means no auto reset function
AUTO RESET
FL.10 Auto reset times Note: 1 0 ×
TIMES
No auto reset function for module protection and external equipment fault.
RESET
FL.11 Reset interval 2.0~20.0s/time 0.1s 5.0s ×
INTERVAL

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

106 Appendix 1 Parameters

Group FL: Protection Parameters

Factory
Para. Name LCD display Setting range Unit Modif.
setting
Unit’s place of LED: Protective action triggered by communication failure
0:Alarm and coast to stop
1:No alarm and continue running
2:No alarm and stop in stopping mode(only in serial port control mode)
3: No alarm and stop in stopping mode(in all control modes)
PROTECTION
FL.12 Protective action 1 Ten’s place of LED: Protective action triggered by contactor failure 1 001 ×
ACTION 1
0:Alarm and coast to stop
1:No alarm and continue running
Hundred’s place of LED: Protective action triggered by EEPROM fault
0:Alarm and coast to stop
1:No alarm and continue
Unit’s place of LED: Protective action triggered by under voltage
0:Disabled
1:Enabled (under voltage is considered as a fault)
Ten’s place of LED: Fault indication during auto-reset interval enabled
0:Disabled
1:Enabled
Hundred’s place of LED:fault locking function selection
PROTECTION
FL.13 Protective action 2 0:Disabled 1 0000 ×
ACTION 2
1:Enabled (fault indication is disabled)
2:Enabled (fault indication is enabled)
Thousand’s place of LED: Phase failure function enabled
0:Input and output phase failure protective function enabled
1:Input phase failure protective function disabled
2:Output phase failure protective function disabled
3:Input and output phase failure protective function disabled
0:No fault
1:Over-current in accelerating process(E001)
2:Over-current in decelerating process (E002)
Type of third latest st 3:Over-current in constant-speed running process (E003)
FL.14 1 fault
fault 4:Over-voltage in accelerating process (E004)
5:Over-voltage in decelerating process (E005)
6:Over-voltage in constant-speed running process (E006)
7:Control power supply over voltage(E007)
8:Input phase failure(E008)
9:Output phase failure(E009)
10:IGBT protection(E010)
11:IGBT Heatsink over-temperature (E011)
Type of second 12:Rectifier Heatsink over-temperature (E012)
FL.15 2nd fault
latest fault 13:Drive overload (E013)
14:Motor overload (E014)
1 0 *
15:Emergent stop (E015)
16:EEPROM w/r error (E016)
17:serial port communication fault(E017)
18:contactor fault(E018)
19:current detection circuit fault (E019 ) (hall sensor or amplify circuit fault)
20:system disturbance (E020)
21:Reserved
22:Reserved
FL.16 Type of latest fault 3rd FAULT 23:Paremeter copy fault (E023)
24:self-adjustment fault (E024)
Note:
① E007 can be detected by 18.5G/22G drive after it is in stop state for 3
minutes. It cannot be detected by the drive below 15G. It can be detected
by the drive of other models all the time
② E010 can be reset after 10 seconds;
DC Bus Voltage at VOLT AT
FL.17 0~999V 1V 0V *
the last fault FAULT

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

 Appendix 1 Parameters 107

Group FL: Protection Parameters

Factory
Para. Name LCD display Setting range Unit Modif.
setting
Current at the last CURR AT
FL.18 0.0~999.9A 0.1A 0.0A *
fault FAULT
Frequency at the FREQ AT 0.01
FL.19 0.00Hz~650.0Hz 0.00Hz *
last fault FAULT Hz

Group Fn: Drive’s Parameters

Factory
Parameter Name LCD Display Setting range Unit Modification
setting
Fn.00 Preset operating time ENGAGE RUN TIME 0~65.535K hours 0.001k hours 0 ○

Fn.01 Total operating time TOTAL RUN TIME 0~65.535K hours 0.001k hours 0 *
Fn.02 Temperature of heatsink 1 HEATSINK1 TEMP 0.0~100.0℃ 0.1 0℃ *
Fn.03 Temperature of heatsink 2 HEATSINK2 TEMP 0.0~100.0℃ 0.1 0℃ *

Group FP: Parameter Security Functions

Factory
Parameter Name LCD Display Setting range Unit Modification
setting
User’s USER 0:No password
FP.00 0 0 ○
password PASSWORD Others: Protected by Password
0: Modifying all parameters is enabled
Selection of
PARA 1: Modifying other parameters is disabled except F0.00 and
FP.01 parameter 1 1 ○
PROTECTION EP.01
write-in states
2: Modifying other parameters is disabled except EP.01
0: Parameter modification enabled state
Parameter PARA
FP.02 1: clear the memorizing information (FL.14~19) 1 0 ×
initialization INITIALIZE
2: Recover the factory settings (before FL.13)
0:disabled
1:parameter upload
Parameter 2:parameter download
FP.03 PARA COPY 1 00 ×
copy 3:parameter download (except the parameters related to the
drive itself)
Note: Only valid to LCD panel;
FP.04 Reserved RESERVED - - 0 *

Group FU: Factory Settings

Parameter Name LCD Display Setting range Unit Factory setting Modification
Factory FACTORY Factory
FU.00 **** 1 -
password PASSWORD password

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

108 Appendix 2 Accessories

Appendix 2 Accessories

Notes: L1 e
Our company does not supply reactor and EMI filter, so
you should order them separately. The following models
have been tested on our drive. You can contact us if you
need them.

h
AC/DC Reactor

AC input reactor and output reactor

n2 4- d n1
1. Model description
L2 b1
AC input reactor: TDL-4AI01-0300, where 0300 denotes

the power level, similar to the power level of the drive. Fig. A-2 Outline of 3-PH AC input and output reactor (b)

AC output reactor: TDL-4AO01-0300, where 0300 L3 e

denotes the power level, similar to the power level of the

drive.

2. Sizes

h
The sizes of AC input reactor and output reactor are

classified into three types, as shown in Fig. A-1 ~

Fig.A-3. See Table A-2 ~ Table A-4 for the details.

n2 4- d
n1
L1 L2 b1
L1

Fig. A-3 Outline of 3-PH AC input and output reactor (c)

h

n2 4- d n1
L2 b1

Fig. A-1 Outline of 3-PH AC input and output reactor (a)

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

 Appendix 2 Recommended Parameters of Accessories 109

3. Parameters of 3-PH AC input reactor (TDL-4AI01-XXXX)

Table A-2 Parameters of 380V series 3-PH AC input reactor (2%)

Drive’s Reactor Installation sizes
Cutout sizes (mm) Weight PC Pm
power Reactor model product Fig. No. (mm)
[kg] (W) (W)
(kW) code L3 L1 L2 B1 h e n2 n1 d
5.5 K119-ER04 120 106 80 100 80 60 6.5 2.1 7 25
TDL-4AI01-0075
7.5 K119-ER05 120 106 80 100 80 75 6.5 3.0 8 30
Fig. A-2
11 K119-ER06 130 120 80 125 90 70 6.5 4.5 9 40
TDL-4AI01-0150
15 K119-ER07 165 148 80 135 120 70 6.5 6.0 12 55
18.5 K119-ER08 165 148 80 135 120 70 6.5 6.0 12 55
TDL-4AI01-0220
22 K119-ER09 165 148 80 135 120 70 6.5 6.3 12 55
Fig. A-3
30 K119-ER10 165 148 80 135 120 70 6.5 7.5 15 60
TDL-4AI01-0370
37 K119-ER11 165 148 80 135 120 70 6.5 7.8 15 60
45 K119-ER12 190 170 80 160 70 140 70 6.5 10 20 70
TDL-4AI01-0550
55 K119-ER13 190 170 80 160 70 140 70 6.5 11 20 70
75 K119-ER14 190 170 100 160 70 140 80 6.5 12 25 80
TDL-4AI01-0900 Fig. A-2
90 K119-ER15 215 200 120 200 90 170 100 6.5 22 50 130
110 K119-ER16 215 200 140 200 100 160 120 6.5 26 56 150
TDL-4AI01-1320
132 K119-ER17 215 200 140 200 100 160 120 6.5 26 56 150
160 TDL-4AI01-1600 K119-ER18 280 245 226 150 240 110 185 125 13 40 85 188
200 K119-ER19 Fig. A-3 280 245 226 150 240 110 185 125 13 40 85 188
TDL-4AI01-2200
220 K119-ER20 280 245 226 150 240 110 185 125 13 40 85 188

Table A-3 Parameters of 380V series 3-PH AC input reactor (4%)

Drive’s Reactor Installation sizes
Cutout sizes (mm) Weight PC Pm
power Reactor model product Fig. No. (mm)
(kg) (W) (W)
(kW) code L3 L1 L2 B1 h e n2 n1 d
5.5 K119-EM28 130 120 80 125 90 70 6.5 4.5 9 40
TDL-4AI01-0075
7.5 K119-EM29 165 148 80 135 120 70 6.5 6.0 12 55
11 K119-EM30 Fig. A-1 165 148 80 135 120 70 6.5 6.0 12 55
TDL-4AI01-0150
15 K119-EM31 165 148 80 135 120 70 6.5 7.5 15 60
18.5 K119-EM32 165 148 80 135 120 70 6.5 7.5 15 60
TDL-4AI01-0220
22 K119-EM33 190 170 80 160 70 140 70 6.5 10 15 60
30 K119-EM34 190 170 100 160 70 140 80 6.5 12 20 70
TDL-4AI01-0370
37 K119-EM35 Fig. A-2 215 200 120 200 90 170 100 6.5 22 25 80
45 K119-EM36 215 200 120 200 90 170 100 6.5 22 50 130
TDL-4AI01-0550
55 K119-EM37 215 200 140 200 100 160 120 6.5 26 50 130
75 K119-EM38 280 245 226 150 240 110 185 125 13 40 56 150
TDL-4AI01-0900
90 K119-EM39 280 245 226 150 240 110 185 125 13 40 85 188
110 K119-EM40 310 280 256 150 260 110 220 125 13 50 85 188
TDL-4AI01-1320
132 K119-EM41 Fig. A-3 310 280 256 150 260 110 220 125 13 50 120 240
160 TDL-4AI01-1600 K119-EM42 310 280 256 150 260 110 220 125 13 50 120 240
200 K119-EM43 360 330 308 170 310 120 265 150 13 80 120 240
TDL-4AI01-2200
220 K119-EM44 360 330 308 170 310 120 265 150 13 80 170 360

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

110 Appendix 2 Accessories

4. Parameters of 3-PH AC output reactor (TDL-4AO01-XXXX)

Table A-3 Parameters of 380V series 3-PH AC output reactor

Drive’s Installation
Reactor Cutout sizes (mm) Weight PC Pm
power Reactor model Fig. No. sizes (mm)
product code (kg) (W) (W)
(kW) L3 L1 L2 B1 h e n2 n1 d
5.5 K220-EM05
TDL-4AO01-0075 130 120 80 125 90 70 6.5 4.5 9 40
7.5
11 K220-EM07
TDL-4AO01-0150 Fig. A-1 165 148 80 135 120 70 6.5 6.0 12 55
15
18.5 K220-EM08 165 148 80 135 120 70 6.5 7.5 15 60
TDL-4AO01-0220
22 K220-EM09 165 148 80 135 120 70 6.5 7.5 15 60
30 K220-EM10 190 170 80 160 70 140 70 6.5 10 20 70
TDL-4AO01-0370
37 K220-EM11 190 170 100 160 70 140 80 6.5 12 25 80
45 K220-EM12 190 170 100 160 70 140 80 6.5 12 25 80
TDL-4AO01-0550
55 K220-EM13 190 170 100 160 70 140 80 6.5 12 25 80
75 K220-EM14 215 200 120 200 90 170 100 6.5 22 50 130
TDL-4AO01-0900 Fig. A-2
90 K220-EM15 215 200 120 200 90 170 100 6.5 23 50 132
110 K220-EM16 215 200 120 200 90 170 100 6.5 24 50 133
TDL-4AO01-1320
132 K220-EM17 215 200 120 200 90 170 100 6.5 24 50 135
160 TDL-4AO01-1600 K220-EM18 215 200 140 200 100 160 120 6.5 26 56 150
200 K220-EM19 215 200 140 200 100 160 120 6.5 26 56 151
TDL-4AO01-2200
220 K220-EM20 Fig. A-3 280 245 226 150 240 110 185 125 13 40 85 190

DC reactor

1. Model description

TDL-4DI01-0300, where 0300 denotes the power level, similar to the power level of the drive.

2. Sizes

The sizes of DC reactor are classified into two types, as shown in Fig. A-4 ~ Fig.A-5. See Table A-5 for the details.

L3 e
h

4- d n2 4- d n1
n2 n1 L2 b1
L1 b1 L1

Fig. A-4 Outline of DC reactor (a) Fig. A-5 Outline of DC reactor (b)

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

 Appendix 2 Recommended Parameters of Accessories 111

3. Parameters of DC reactor (TDL-4DI01-XXXX)

The 75kWG and larger drives with standard configurations have DC reactor. The models and parameters for reactors

applicable to 55kW or below drives are listed below.

Table A-5 Parameters of 380V series DC reactor

Drive’s Cutout sizes Installation sizes
Reactor Weight( PC Pm
power Reactor model Fig. No. (mm) (mm)
product code kg) (W) (W)
(kW) L1 b1 h n2 n1 d
11
TDL-4DI01-0150 K424-EM02 114 100 98 100 80 6.5 4 15 23.5
15
18.5 K424-EM04
TDL-4DI01-0220 Fig.A-4 134 100 114 120 80 6.5 6.8 24 30.6
22
30 K424-EM05 134 120 114 120 100 6.5 8 28 33.2
TDL-4DI01-0370
37 K424-EM06 134 140 114 120 100 6.5 10 33 42.8
45 K424-EM07 134 140 114 120 100 6.5 10 33 42.8
TDL-4DI01-0550 Fig.A-5
55 K425-EM10 135 120 225 100 80 6.5 14 36 63.7

380V Series EMI Filter

1. Model description

DL-20EBT1, where DL denotes the power filter series of Changzhou Jianli Electronic Co.,Ltd., 20 denotes the rated

current, EB denotes the 3-PH 3-wire system, while T1 and K1 denotes the internal circuit structure.

2. Sizes

The sizes of EMI filter are shown in Fig. A-6. See Table A-6 for the details.

P
M

F
E

I
G
B
A J

C H

Fig. A-4 Outline of EMI

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

112 Appendix 2 Accessories

3. Parameters of 380V series EMI filter (DL-XXEBX1)

Table A-6 Mechanical parameters of EMI filter

Drive’s Sizes (mm)
Weight
power Filter model
A B C D E F G H I J K M N P L (kg)
(kW)

5.5 7.5 DL-20EBT1 243 220 261 58 70 100 25 90 M6 58 M4 74 49 M6 6.4×9.4 3.5

11 15 DL-35EBT1 243 220 261 58 70 100 25 90 M6 58 M4 74 49 M6 6.4×9.4 4.0

18.5 22 DL-50EBT1 243 220 261 58 70 100 25 90 M6 58 M4 74 49 M6 6.4×9.4 4.0

30 37 DL-80EBT1 354 320 384 66 155 185 30 90 M8 62 M4 86 56 M8 6.4×9.4 8.5

45 DL-100EBK1 354 320 384 66 155 185 30 90 M8 62 M4 86 56 M8 6.4×9.4 9.0

55 75 DL-150EBK1 354 320 384 66 155 185 30 90 M8 62 M4 86 56 M8 6.4×9.4 9.5

90 DL-200EBK1 354 320 384 66 190 220 35 100 M8 62 M4 86 61 M8 6.4×9.4 13.0

Manufacturer Information

AC/DC reactor

Hua Shenglong Electrical Co.,Ltd.

Address (head office): 3-20#, Yellow River Road, Economic and Technological Development Zone,

Qinhuangdao City, Hebei Province

Postal Code: 066004

Address (Changzhou branch): Furong Industrial park, Wujin District, Changzhou City

Postal Code: 213118

Telephone: (86-519) 8651555 Fax: (86-519) 8651777

Website: www.hslec.com

E-mail: [email protected]

EMI filter

Changzhou Jianli Electronic Co.,Ltd.

Address: 272#, Qingtan Road, Changzhou City, Jiangsu Province, P.R.China

Postal code: 213015

Telephone: (86-0519) 6972136 6973215 6984439 Fax: (86-0519) 6960580

Website: www.cnfilter.com

E-mail: [email protected]

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

 Appendix 3 Communication Protocol 113

Appendix 3 Communication Protocol

1 Networking Mode

Master: PC or Master: PC Master: PC Master: PC

RS232 RS232 RS232

RS232-RS485 RS232-RS485
adapter adapter

RS485
RS485

TD1000 TD2000 TD2100 EV2000 EV2000 EV2000

Single master and multi-slave Single master and single slave

Fig. A-6 Networking diagram of drives

2 Interfaces

RS485 or RS232: asynchronous, semi-duplex

Default: 8-N-1, 9600bps. See Group FF for parameter settings.

3 Communication Modes

The drive is a slave in the network. It communicates in ‘point to point’ mode. The drive will not response to the

command sent by the master via broadcast address.

Users can set the drive’s current address, baud rate and data format by using the drive’ keypad or through the serial

communication port.

The drive can report the current fault information when polled by the master.

EV2000 provides two interfaces: RS232 and RS485. Pay attention that the Jumper CN14 should be in correct position.

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

114 Appendix 3 Communication Protocol

4 Protocol Format

ccoom
mmm aanndd fra
fr am
m ee ooff m
m aasste
terr
s e n d in g 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
seq u en ce

A B B C C D D E E F F F F I I I I J

d e fin itio n
head Add C o m m and index data setting verificatio n tail

s e n d in g 1 2 2 4 4 4 1
b y te
ccoommmm aanndd ffrraammee oo ff mmaasstt ee rr
s e n d in g 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
seq u en ce

A B B H H G G E E F F F F I I I I J

d e fin itio n data setting

head Add R espo nse Index verificatio n tail
s e n d in g
b y te 1 2 2 4 4 4 1

Where:

A: Frame head B: Slave address, C: Master command D: Auxiliary index E: Index or command F: Data setting

G: Index of Slave H: Response of Slave I: Verify checksum J: Frame tail

“Configuration data section” and “operation data section” may not exist in the concrete protocol frame. In that case, they

are labeled with “NULL” in the protocol list.

In the protocol, the effective characters are: ~, 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, A, B, C, D, E, F and hex ODH. And the

low-case ASCII letters such as a, b, d, e, f are invalid.

The frame for effective command has 14 or 18 bytes. Sometimes, the response frame has 10 bytes, e.g. invalid

command or data overflow.

EV2000 supports commands of Group 3 and 4 for an interim period to be compatible with your previous developed

basic operating functions of the host software. It is suggested to use Group 6~7 commands instead of Group 3~4

command in your new host communication program.

5 Explanations of Format

5.1 Head of Frame

“~” means 7E (hex), single byte.

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

 Appendix 3 Communication Protocol 115

5.2 Address of Slave

Definition of Data: the slave’s address. two bytes, ASCII format.

Configuration range: “00”~”7F”. “7F” is broadcast address. The default of the drive is “01”.

5.3 Response of Slave to Master’s Command

Definition of Data: The response of slave to the command from the Master. Two Bytes. ASCII Format.

Classification of Parameters:

Command Code = “00”: Master drive asks Slave drive to feed back the current status(ready or not ready) and control

status.

Table A-6 Meaning of response code given command code “00”

Meaning
Response
Ready or not ready status of
Code ASCII Master drive control enabled Setting frequency enabled
slave drive
10 Not Ready No meaning
11 Ready Enabled Enabled
12 Ready Enabled Disabled
13 Ready Disabled Enabled
14 Ready Disabled Disabled
20 Frame wrong

Command Code＝"01"～"08"

Response Code＝“00” means:

Communication and control of slave are normal. The changes of parameters are valid. The password is correct.

Response Code＝“20” means:

The frame is verified to be incorrect. The data of “Command Section” and “Index Section overflow.

Incorrect Frame length/there are non-ASCII code except frame head and frame tail.

Note: Whether the response code reported is related with the current configuration status of the slave. Refer to the

notes of “command code = 5”. When reporting the response code, data in “command section”, “index section” and

“operation data section” will not be reported.

Response Code＝ “30” means:

The control command to the slave is inactive. The changes of parameters are invalid. The data in

“configuration/operation data” section overflow. The password is incorrect.

Note: Whether the response code is reported is related with the current configuration status of the slave. Refer to the

notes of “command code = 5”. When reporting the response code, data in “command section”, “index section” and

“operation data section” will be reported according to the requirements of the protocol.

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

116 Appendix 3 Communication Protocol

5.4 Index Section

Meaning of Data: Auxiliary index bytes and command index bytes are included.

For the master, the auxiliary index and command index are used to cooperate with the master to accomplish concrete

functions.

For the slave, auxiliary index is used to report fault code. The command code will not be changed but reported directly.

Data type: Hex, four bytes. ASCII format.

Command code uses the lower two bytes, data range: “00”~”FF”.

Auxiliary code uses the higher two bytes, data range: “00”~”FF”.

The fault code of the slave will occupy “auxiliary index” byte, see Table A-7.

Table A-7 Type of faults

Fault Index Description of Fault Fault Index Description of Fault
01 Over current in Acc process 02 Over current in Dec process
Over current in constant-speed
03 04 Over voltage in Acc process
Running process
Over voltage in constant-speed
05 Over voltage in Dec process 06
Running process
07 Over voltage in stopping process 08 Phase failure of AC supply
09 Phase loss of drive’s AC output 10 IGBT fault
11 IGBT overheat 12 Rectifier bridge overheat
13 Drive overload 14 Motor overload
External equipment fault of emergent
15 16 EEPROM fault
stop
17 Serial communication error 18 Contactor unclosed
19 Current detection error 20 CPU error
23 Parameters copy error 24 Auto-tuning error

5.5 Checksum

Meaning of Data: Frame verification. Four bytes. ASCII.

Calculation method: To sum up the ASCII values of all the bytes from “slave address” to “operation data”.

5.6 Frame Tail

Hex OD, Single byte.

1) Command list of protocols

In the following explanation, frame head 7E, frame tail OD, address and checksum are omitted. The format is ASCII

character.

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

 Appendix 3 Communication Protocol 117

Table A-8 List of command protocol

Command Auxiliary Command Setting
Name Example Accuracy Notes
of master index index range
Inquire the slave status 00 00 00 None ~010000000181\r 1 See table A-6
Current
Operating 01 00 00 None ~010100000182\r 0.01 Hz
Frequency
Current
frequency 01 00 01 None ~010100010183\r 0.01 Hz
setting
Output voltage 01 00 02 None ~010100020184\r 1V
Output current 01 00 03 None ~010100030185\r 0.1A
Displayed value
01 00 04 None ~010100040186\r 1
Read the slave’s parameters

without units
Preset rotating
01 00 05 None ~010100050187\r 1rpm
speed
Running line
01 00 06 None ~010100060188\r 0.01m/Min
speed
Preset line
01 00 07 None ~010100070189\r 0.01m/Min
speed
Close loop
feedback of
01 00 08 None ~01010008018A\r 0.01V
analog close
loop control
Close loop
setting of
01 00 09 None ~01010009018B\r 0.01V
analog close
loop control
External
01 00 0A None ~0101000A0193\r 1
counting value
Output torque 01 00 0B None ~0101000B0194\r 0.1%
Bit0~14, respectively are
X1~X8, Y1, Y2, TC, fan,
I/O status 01 00 0C None ~0101000C0195\r 1
Read the slave’s

braking signal, FWD and

parameters

REV
Present status 01 00 0D None ~0101000D0196\r 1 See table A-9
Operating
frequency after 01 00 14 None ~010100140187\r 0.01 Hz
compensation

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

118 Appendix 3 Communication Protocol

Command Auxiliary Command Setting

Name Example Accuracy Notes
of master index index range
Start-up of
02 00 00 None ~010200000183\r None
slave
Set present
reference 0Hz~upper
02 00 01 ~0102000103E80264\r 0.01 Hz Frequency setting =10.00Hz
frequency of frequency
slave
Frequency Frequency setting at the
0Hz~upper
setting at the start-up of the slave
02 00 02 frequency ~0102000203E80265\r 0.01 Hz
start-up of the =10.00Hz
limit
slave
Forward
start-up of the 02 00 03 None ~010200030186\r None
slave
Forward
start-up of the 02 00 04 None ~010200040187\r None
slave
Frequency Frequency setting at the
0Hz~upper
setting at the forward start-up of the slave
02 00 05 frequency ~0102000503E80268\r 0.01 Hz
forward start-up =10.00Hz
limit
of the slave
Frequency Frequency setting at the
0Hz~ upper
setting at the reverse start-up of the slave
02 00 06 frequency ~0102000603E80269\r 0.01 Hz
reverse start-up =10.00Hz
Operation control and adjustment function

limit
of the slave
Stop of slave 02 00 07 None ~01020007018A\r None
Jog operation of
02 00 08 None ~01020008018B\r None
slave
Forward jog
operation of 02 00 09 None ~01020009018C\r None
slave
Reverse jog
operation of 02 00 0A None ~0102000A0194\r None
slave
Stop the jog
operation of the 02 00 0B None ~0102000B0195\r None
slave
Reset the slave
02 00 0C None ~0102000C0196\r None
upon failure
Coast-to-stop of
02 00 0D None ~0102000D0197\r None
slave
Emergent stop
02 00 0E None ~0102000E0198\r None
of slave
Set the rate of 0~65535
analog output 02 00 13 0~FFFF ~0102001333330253\r mapping Set AO1 output to 20%
AO1 0~100%
Set the rate of 0~65535
analog output 02 00 14 0~FFFF ~0102001433330254\r mapping Set AO2 output to 20%
AO2 0~100%
Set the rate of 0~65535
digital output 02 00 15 0~FFFF ~0102001533330255\r mapping Set DO to 20%*F7.32 Hz
DO 0~100%
Ratio of
Set the frequency ratio to
frequency 02 00 16 0~7D0 ~0102001603E8026A\r 0.1%
100%
(preserved)
Set the terminal Bit0~12: The fictitious
status of 02 00 17 0~FFFF ~01020017FFFF02A3\r 1 terminals X1~X8, FWD,
fictitious control REV, Y1, Y2 and TC

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

 Appendix 3 Communication Protocol 119

Command Auxiliary Command Setting

Name Example Accuracy Notes
of master index index range
F0.02 03 00 01 None ~010300010185\r 0.01 Hz
(temporary functions)
Read the parameters

F0.04 03 00 03 None ~010300030187\r 1

F0.10 03 00 09 None ~01030009018D\r 0.1S
F0.11 03 00 0A None ~0103000A0195\r 0.1S
F5.05 03 00 66 None ~010300660190\r 0.01V
F5.06 03 00 6C None ~0103006C019D\r 1rpm
0~upper
F0.02 04 00 01 ~0104000103E80266\r 0.01 Hz F0.02=10.00Hz
freq. limit
(temporary functions)
Set the parameters

F0.04 04 00 03 0 and 1 ~0104000300010249\r 1 Set F0.04 to reverse running

F0.10 04 00 09 0~8CA0 ~0104000900640258\r 0.1S Set F0.10 to 10.0s
F0.11 04 00 0A 0~8CA0 ~0104000A00640260\r 0.1S Set F0.11 to 10.0s
F5.05 04 00 66 0~03E8 ~0104006603E80271\r 0.01V Set F5.05 to 10.00V
F5.06 04 00 6C 0~9858 ~0104006C03E8027E\r 1Rpm Set F5.06 to 1000Rpm
Bit0~2: whether the slave
response to the received
Configure the wrong data, invalid
System configuration

response of 05 00 00 0~7 ~010500000007024D\r 1 command, operation control,

slave and adjust functions; 1:
response, 0: not response,
default is 5
Inquire the 12000+version number, if
slave’s type and the version is V1.0, then the
05 00 01 0~FFFF ~010500010187\r 1
software read value is : 12000+10
version =12010, that is 2EEA
The usages of group 7 and
group 8 commands are
Read the parameters same, except that group 7
06 See table A-10 None See Table A-10 1
(Group No.＋Index mode) commands can write
parameters in EEPROM,
while group 8 commands
can only modify the
Dependent parameters in DSP RAM
Read the parameters
07(08) See table A-11 0~FFFF SeeTable A-11 on function (F0.08 and FH.01 and the
(Group No.＋Index mode)
codes associated parameters not
included)

Table A-9 Meaning of operating status

Meaning
Bit
Description 0 1
Bit0 Stop/run status Stop Run
Bit1 Low voltage flag Normal Low voltage
Bit2～6 Reserved
Bit7 Symbol for preset counting value arriving Invalid Valid
Bit8 Symbol for specified counting value arriving Invalid Valid
Bit9 Traverse operation mode No Yes
Bit10 Forward/reverse operation mode Forward Reverse
Bit11 PI close loop operation mode No Yes
Bit12 Common operation mode No Yes
Bit13 Jog operation mode None Jog
Bit14 PLC operation mode No Yes

Bit15 Operation at preset frequency No Yes

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

120 Appendix 3 Communication Protocol

By “Read parameters (Group No.＋Index No.)” command, you can view all the parameters of the slave drive of EV2000

except the user’s password.

Table A-10 Read the parameters of the slave

Function
Read the function parameters: All the function parameters except user’s password and factory password
meanings
Meanings Frame head Address Command Index of command Operation data Verify checksum Frame tail
Master command 7EH ADDR 06 See Remark None BCC 0DH
Number of byte 1 2 2 4 0 4 1
Slave Response 7EH ADDR 00 See Remark Parameters BCC 0DH
Number of byte 1 2 2 4 4 4 1
Index of command is comprised by the group No. of parameters, and HEX number of Parameter No.
For example:
If parameters of F1.11 is to be read, then Index of command=010B;
If parameters of F9.16 is to be read, then Index of command=0910;
If parameters of FF.01 is to be read, then Index of command=0F01;
If parameters of FP.02 is to be read, then Index of command=1302;
Relationship between the decimal value and Hex. Value
Group No. of parameters Decimal HEX. Group No. of parameters Decimal HEX.
F0 0 00H F8 8 08H
Remark
F1 1 01H F9 9 09H
F2 2 02H FA 10 0AH
F3 3 03H FF 15 0FH
F4 4 04H FH 16 10H
F5 5 05H FL 17 11H
F6 6 06H Fn 18 12H
F7 7 07H FP 19 13H
Valid data 0~FFFF(That is: 0~65535)
Example ~0106010B019A\r Read the parameters of F1.11

Set parameters (Group No.＋Index No.)

All the parameters of EV2000 series drives except the parameters whose property is ‘*’ and FP.02~FP.04 can be set.

See Appendix 1.

When setting the parameters, each value must be valid, e.g., when setting F9.00, “Operation data” in the

communication frame should be ASCII code, e.g. 0000, 0666 or 0543 is correct, while 0127 or 1000 is incorrect.

Otherwise, the result will be wrong. Please read the parameters carefully and determine its range before using.

“User’s password” should be input before setting the parameters.

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

 Appendix 3 Communication Protocol 121

Table A-11 Set slave drive’s parameters

Function
Set the slave drive’s parameters: all parameters
meanings
Verify
Meanings Frame head Address Command Index of command Operation data Frame tail
checksum
Master’s
7EH ADDR 07(08) See Remark Parameters BCC 0DH
Command
Number of byte 1 2 2 4 4 4 1
Response of
7EH ADDR 00 See Remark Parameters BCC 0DH
slave
Number of byte 1 2 2 4 4 4 1
Index of command is comprised by the group No. of parameters, and HEX number of Parameter No., for example:
If parameters of F1.11 is to be read, then Index of command=010B;
If parameters of F9.16 is to be read, then Index of command=0910;
If parameters of FF.01 is to be read, then Index of command=0F01;
If parameters of FP.01 is to be read, then Index of command=1301;
Relationship between the decimal value and Hex. Value

Group No. of Group No. of

Decimal HEX. Decimal HEX.
parameters parameters
F0 0 00H F8 8 08H
Remark
F1 1 01H F9 9 09H
F2 2 02H FA 10 0AH
F3 3 03H FF 15 0FH
F4 4 04H FH 16 10H
F5 5 05H FL 17 11H
F6 6 06H Fn 18 12H
F7 7 07H FP 19 13H
Valid data 0~FFFF(That is: 0~65535)
Example ~010713010000024D\r Set FP.01 to 0, all the parameters are enabled to be changed.

Note:
The usages of group 7 and group 8 commands are the same. To avoid damaging EEPROM, the parameters changed frequently
should be saved in DSP RAM by group 8 commands if not necessarily written in EEPROM.
2) Example (Turbo C 2.0): Send the command of running the drive, stopping the drive and setting the frequency (need to
set F0.00=2, F0.03=2 first.)
#include <dos.h>

#include <bios.h>

#include <conio.h>

#include <stdio.h>

#define COM1 0 /*serial port 1*/

#define COM2 1 /*serial port 2*/

#define SET_COMPARA 0 /*To set the parameters of

communication ports */

#define DEFAULT_BAUD 0xE3 /*8-N-1,9600bps*/

#define PORT_ADDR 0x3F8 /* Address of serial port is

13F8H*/

#define delaytime 100 /*100ms delay time */

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

122 Appendix 3 Communication Protocol

char run_inverter[20]="~010200000183\r"; /* Command of running the

drive */

char stop_inverter[20]="~01020007018A\r"; /* Command of stopping the

drive*/

void send_comd(char *sendstr,char *display_type); /* Send the command */

void checksum(char *sendstr,char result_sum[]); /*Calculate verify checksum*/

main()

char sum_of_cmd[5],buf[25]; /*store the string of 4-byte verify

checksum */

char set_frequency[25]="010200010BB8"; /* set the running frequency at

30.00Hz */

bioscom(SET_COMPARA,DEFAULT_BAUD,COM1); /* set COM1, 8-N-1, 9600bps */

send_comd(run_inverter,"HEX"); /* Send run command, display

in HEX format */

printf("\nPress anykey to set frequency to 30.00Hz ...");

while(!kbhit()); /* wait for pressing any key to

input */

getchar(); /* get character */

checksum(set_frequency,sum_of_cmd); /* get the verify checksum of the

sent command */

sprintf(buf,"~%s%s\r",set_frequency,sum_of_cmd);

strcpy(set_frequency,buf); /* combine the sent frames */

send_comd(set_frequency,"HEX"); /* set to 30.00Hz, display in

HEX format */

printf("\nPress anykey to stop ...");

while(!kbhit()); /* wait for pressing any key to

input */

send_comd(stop_inverter,"ASCII"); /* Send stop command, display

in ASCII format */

void send_comd(char *sendstr,char *display_type)

unsigned int i;

char buf[5]; /* used for character display */

printf("\nSend(%s):",display_type);

for(i=0;i<strlen(sendstr);i++){ /* send the frame command */

outportb(PORT_ADDR,sendstr[i]);

delay(delaytime); /* The delay time should ensure

the command can be sent */

if(display_type[0]=='H') /* determine the display format*/

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

 Appendix 3 Communication Protocol 123

{printf("%02x ",sendstr[i]);} /* display in HEX format */

else{printf("%c",sendstr[i]);} /* display in ASCII format */

void checksum(char *sendstr,char result_sum[])

unsigned int i,sum=0;

static char sum_string[5]; /* calculate the sum of all the

characters */

for(i=0;i<strlen(sendstr);i++)sum+=(unsigned int) sendstr[i];

sprintf(sum_string,"%04x",sum);

for(i=0;i<4;i++)

result_sum[i]=toupper(sum_string[i]); /* convert into capital letters */

result_sum[i]=0x0; /* end of string */

} /*result_sum return ASCII string

of Verify checksum */

EV2000 Series Universal Variable Speed Drive User Manual

 Em erson Netw ork Pow er Co. L t d. Em erson Netw ork Pow er Co. L t d.

Maintenance Record (1) Maintenance Record (2)

Customer’s company: Customer’s company:
Address: Address
Post Code: Contact person: Post Code: Contact person:
Tel: Fax: Tel: Fax:
Drive’s SN: Drive’s SN:
Power: Drive’s model: Power: Model:
Contract number: Purchasing Date: Contract NO. Purchasing Date:
Service provider: Service provider:
Contact person: Tel: Contact person: Tel:
Servicing engineer: Tel: Servicing person : Tel:
Maintenance date: Maintenance date:
Customer’s comments on service quality: Customer’s comments on service quality:
□Excellent □Satisfactory □ Acceptable □Unsatisfactory □Excellent □Satisfactory □ Acceptable □Unsatisfactory
Other Opinions: Other Opinions:

Signature: DD MM YYYY User’s Signature: DD MM YYYY

Visiting Record of Customer Service Center: Visiting Record of Customer Service Center:

□by phone-calls □by questionnaire □by phone-calls □by questionnaire

Others: Others:

Signature: DD MM YYYY(date) Signature: DD MM YYYY(date)

Note: This paper becomes invalid if the user cannot be revisited! Note: This paper becomes invalid if the user cannot be revisisted!
 Notice Notice
1. The warranty range is confined to the drive only. 1. The warranty range is confined to the drive only.
2. Warranty period is 18 months, within which period Emerson Network 2. Warranty period is 18 months, within which period Emerson Network
Power conducts free maintenance and repairing to the drive that has any fault Power conducts free maintenance and repairing to the drive that has any fault
or damage under the normal operation conditions. or damage under the normal operation conditions.
3. The start time of warranty period is the delivery date of the product, of 3. The start time of warranty period is the delivery date of the product, of
which the product SN is the sole basis of judgment. Drives without a product SN which the product SN is the sole basis of judgment. Drives without a product SN
shall be regarded as out of warranty. shall be regarded as out of warranty.
4. Even within 18 months, maintenance will also be charged in the following 4. Even within 18 months, maintenance will also be charged in the following
situations: situations:
„ Damages incurred to the drive due to mis-operations, which are not in „ Damages incurred to the drive due to mis-operations, which are not in
compliance with the User Manual; compliance with the User Manual;
„ Damages incurred to the drive due to fire, flood, abnormal voltage, etc; „ Damages incurred to the drive due to fire, flood, abnormal voltage, etc;
„ Damages incurred to the drive due to the improper use of drive functions. „ Damages incurred to the drive due to the improper use of drive functions.
5.The service fee will be charged according to the actual costs. If there is any 5.The service fee will be charged according to the actual costs. If there is any
contract, the contract prevails. contract, the contract prevails.
6.Please keep this paper and show this paper to the maintenance unit when the 6.Please keep this paper and show this paper to the maintenance unit when the
product needs to be repaired. product needs to be repaired.
7. If you have any question, please contact the distributor or our company 7. If you have any question, please contact the distributor or our company
directly. directly.

ENP Services China ENP Services China

Emerson Netw ork Power Co., Ltd. Emerson Netw ork Power Co., Ltd.

Address: No.1 Kefa Rd., Science & Industry Park, Nanshan District 518057, Address: No.1 Kefa Rd., Science & Industry Park, Nanshan District 518057,

Shenzhen China Shenzhen China

Customer Service Hotline: +86 755 86010581 Customer Service Hotline: +86 755 86010581

Complaint Hotline: +86 755 86010800 Complaint Hotline: +86 755 86010800
To Customers:
Thank you for choosing our products. We are expecting your comments about the quality of the products, so that we

can improve our work and serve you better. We really appreciate if you would fill in the form after the product has

operated for 1 month, and then mail or fax it to the Customer Service Center of Emerson Network Power. We will send

you an exquisite souvenir upon the receipt of the completed Product Quality Feedback Paper. You will receive a special

gift if you can give us any advices on improving the product and service quality.

Customer Service Dept

E m e rs o n N e t wo rk P o w e r C o. , L t d.

Product Quality Feedback Form

Customer name Tel

Address Zip code

Model Date of use

Machine SN

Appearance or
structure

Performance

Package

Material

Quality problem
during usage

Suggestion about
improvement

Address: No.1 Kefa Rd., Science & Industry Park, Nanshan District 518057, Shenzhen China

Tel: +86 755 86010581